xref: /sqlite-3.40.0/src/vdbe.c (revision 9ec82ff2)
1 /*
2 ** 2001 September 15
3 **
4 ** The author disclaims copyright to this source code.  In place of
5 ** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
6 **
7 **    May you do good and not evil.
8 **    May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
9 **    May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
10 **
11 *************************************************************************
12 ** The code in this file implements the function that runs the
13 ** bytecode of a prepared statement.
14 **
15 ** Various scripts scan this source file in order to generate HTML
16 ** documentation, headers files, or other derived files.  The formatting
17 ** of the code in this file is, therefore, important.  See other comments
18 ** in this file for details.  If in doubt, do not deviate from existing
19 ** commenting and indentation practices when changing or adding code.
20 */
21 #include "sqliteInt.h"
22 #include "vdbeInt.h"
23 
24 /*
25 ** Invoke this macro on memory cells just prior to changing the
26 ** value of the cell.  This macro verifies that shallow copies are
27 ** not misused.  A shallow copy of a string or blob just copies a
28 ** pointer to the string or blob, not the content.  If the original
29 ** is changed while the copy is still in use, the string or blob might
30 ** be changed out from under the copy.  This macro verifies that nothing
31 ** like that ever happens.
32 */
33 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
34 # define memAboutToChange(P,M) sqlite3VdbeMemAboutToChange(P,M)
35 #else
36 # define memAboutToChange(P,M)
37 #endif
38 
39 /*
40 ** The following global variable is incremented every time a cursor
41 ** moves, either by the OP_SeekXX, OP_Next, or OP_Prev opcodes.  The test
42 ** procedures use this information to make sure that indices are
43 ** working correctly.  This variable has no function other than to
44 ** help verify the correct operation of the library.
45 */
46 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST
47 int sqlite3_search_count = 0;
48 #endif
49 
50 /*
51 ** When this global variable is positive, it gets decremented once before
52 ** each instruction in the VDBE.  When it reaches zero, the u1.isInterrupted
53 ** field of the sqlite3 structure is set in order to simulate an interrupt.
54 **
55 ** This facility is used for testing purposes only.  It does not function
56 ** in an ordinary build.
57 */
58 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST
59 int sqlite3_interrupt_count = 0;
60 #endif
61 
62 /*
63 ** The next global variable is incremented each type the OP_Sort opcode
64 ** is executed.  The test procedures use this information to make sure that
65 ** sorting is occurring or not occurring at appropriate times.   This variable
66 ** has no function other than to help verify the correct operation of the
67 ** library.
68 */
69 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST
70 int sqlite3_sort_count = 0;
71 #endif
72 
73 /*
74 ** The next global variable records the size of the largest MEM_Blob
75 ** or MEM_Str that has been used by a VDBE opcode.  The test procedures
76 ** use this information to make sure that the zero-blob functionality
77 ** is working correctly.   This variable has no function other than to
78 ** help verify the correct operation of the library.
79 */
80 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST
81 int sqlite3_max_blobsize = 0;
82 static void updateMaxBlobsize(Mem *p){
83   if( (p->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))!=0 && p->n>sqlite3_max_blobsize ){
84     sqlite3_max_blobsize = p->n;
85   }
86 }
87 #endif
88 
89 /*
90 ** This macro evaluates to true if either the update hook or the preupdate
91 ** hook are enabled for database connect DB.
92 */
93 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK
94 # define HAS_UPDATE_HOOK(DB) ((DB)->xPreUpdateCallback||(DB)->xUpdateCallback)
95 #else
96 # define HAS_UPDATE_HOOK(DB) ((DB)->xUpdateCallback)
97 #endif
98 
99 /*
100 ** The next global variable is incremented each time the OP_Found opcode
101 ** is executed. This is used to test whether or not the foreign key
102 ** operation implemented using OP_FkIsZero is working. This variable
103 ** has no function other than to help verify the correct operation of the
104 ** library.
105 */
106 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST
107 int sqlite3_found_count = 0;
108 #endif
109 
110 /*
111 ** Test a register to see if it exceeds the current maximum blob size.
112 ** If it does, record the new maximum blob size.
113 */
114 #if defined(SQLITE_TEST) && !defined(SQLITE_UNTESTABLE)
115 # define UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(P)  updateMaxBlobsize(P)
116 #else
117 # define UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(P)
118 #endif
119 
120 /*
121 ** Invoke the VDBE coverage callback, if that callback is defined.  This
122 ** feature is used for test suite validation only and does not appear an
123 ** production builds.
124 **
125 ** M is an integer, 2 or 3, that indices how many different ways the
126 ** branch can go.  It is usually 2.  "I" is the direction the branch
127 ** goes.  0 means falls through.  1 means branch is taken.  2 means the
128 ** second alternative branch is taken.
129 **
130 ** iSrcLine is the source code line (from the __LINE__ macro) that
131 ** generated the VDBE instruction.  This instrumentation assumes that all
132 ** source code is in a single file (the amalgamation).  Special values 1
133 ** and 2 for the iSrcLine parameter mean that this particular branch is
134 ** always taken or never taken, respectively.
135 */
136 #if !defined(SQLITE_VDBE_COVERAGE)
137 # define VdbeBranchTaken(I,M)
138 #else
139 # define VdbeBranchTaken(I,M) vdbeTakeBranch(pOp->iSrcLine,I,M)
140   static void vdbeTakeBranch(int iSrcLine, u8 I, u8 M){
141     if( iSrcLine<=2 && ALWAYS(iSrcLine>0) ){
142       M = iSrcLine;
143       /* Assert the truth of VdbeCoverageAlwaysTaken() and
144       ** VdbeCoverageNeverTaken() */
145       assert( (M & I)==I );
146     }else{
147       if( sqlite3GlobalConfig.xVdbeBranch==0 ) return;  /*NO_TEST*/
148       sqlite3GlobalConfig.xVdbeBranch(sqlite3GlobalConfig.pVdbeBranchArg,
149                                       iSrcLine,I,M);
150     }
151   }
152 #endif
153 
154 /*
155 ** Convert the given register into a string if it isn't one
156 ** already. Return non-zero if a malloc() fails.
157 */
158 #define Stringify(P, enc) \
159    if(((P)->flags&(MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))==0 && sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(P,enc,0)) \
160      { goto no_mem; }
161 
162 /*
163 ** An ephemeral string value (signified by the MEM_Ephem flag) contains
164 ** a pointer to a dynamically allocated string where some other entity
165 ** is responsible for deallocating that string.  Because the register
166 ** does not control the string, it might be deleted without the register
167 ** knowing it.
168 **
169 ** This routine converts an ephemeral string into a dynamically allocated
170 ** string that the register itself controls.  In other words, it
171 ** converts an MEM_Ephem string into a string with P.z==P.zMalloc.
172 */
173 #define Deephemeralize(P) \
174    if( ((P)->flags&MEM_Ephem)!=0 \
175        && sqlite3VdbeMemMakeWriteable(P) ){ goto no_mem;}
176 
177 /* Return true if the cursor was opened using the OP_OpenSorter opcode. */
178 #define isSorter(x) ((x)->eCurType==CURTYPE_SORTER)
179 
180 /*
181 ** Allocate VdbeCursor number iCur.  Return a pointer to it.  Return NULL
182 ** if we run out of memory.
183 */
184 static VdbeCursor *allocateCursor(
185   Vdbe *p,              /* The virtual machine */
186   int iCur,             /* Index of the new VdbeCursor */
187   int nField,           /* Number of fields in the table or index */
188   int iDb,              /* Database the cursor belongs to, or -1 */
189   u8 eCurType           /* Type of the new cursor */
190 ){
191   /* Find the memory cell that will be used to store the blob of memory
192   ** required for this VdbeCursor structure. It is convenient to use a
193   ** vdbe memory cell to manage the memory allocation required for a
194   ** VdbeCursor structure for the following reasons:
195   **
196   **   * Sometimes cursor numbers are used for a couple of different
197   **     purposes in a vdbe program. The different uses might require
198   **     different sized allocations. Memory cells provide growable
199   **     allocations.
200   **
201   **   * When using ENABLE_MEMORY_MANAGEMENT, memory cell buffers can
202   **     be freed lazily via the sqlite3_release_memory() API. This
203   **     minimizes the number of malloc calls made by the system.
204   **
205   ** The memory cell for cursor 0 is aMem[0]. The rest are allocated from
206   ** the top of the register space.  Cursor 1 is at Mem[p->nMem-1].
207   ** Cursor 2 is at Mem[p->nMem-2]. And so forth.
208   */
209   Mem *pMem = iCur>0 ? &p->aMem[p->nMem-iCur] : p->aMem;
210 
211   int nByte;
212   VdbeCursor *pCx = 0;
213   nByte =
214       ROUND8(sizeof(VdbeCursor)) + 2*sizeof(u32)*nField +
215       (eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE?sqlite3BtreeCursorSize():0);
216 
217   assert( iCur>=0 && iCur<p->nCursor );
218   if( p->apCsr[iCur] ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/
219     sqlite3VdbeFreeCursor(p, p->apCsr[iCur]);
220     p->apCsr[iCur] = 0;
221   }
222   if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize(pMem, nByte) ){
223     p->apCsr[iCur] = pCx = (VdbeCursor*)pMem->z;
224     memset(pCx, 0, offsetof(VdbeCursor,pAltCursor));
225     pCx->eCurType = eCurType;
226     pCx->iDb = iDb;
227     pCx->nField = nField;
228     pCx->aOffset = &pCx->aType[nField];
229     if( eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ){
230       pCx->uc.pCursor = (BtCursor*)
231           &pMem->z[ROUND8(sizeof(VdbeCursor))+2*sizeof(u32)*nField];
232       sqlite3BtreeCursorZero(pCx->uc.pCursor);
233     }
234   }
235   return pCx;
236 }
237 
238 /*
239 ** Try to convert a value into a numeric representation if we can
240 ** do so without loss of information.  In other words, if the string
241 ** looks like a number, convert it into a number.  If it does not
242 ** look like a number, leave it alone.
243 **
244 ** If the bTryForInt flag is true, then extra effort is made to give
245 ** an integer representation.  Strings that look like floating point
246 ** values but which have no fractional component (example: '48.00')
247 ** will have a MEM_Int representation when bTryForInt is true.
248 **
249 ** If bTryForInt is false, then if the input string contains a decimal
250 ** point or exponential notation, the result is only MEM_Real, even
251 ** if there is an exact integer representation of the quantity.
252 */
253 static void applyNumericAffinity(Mem *pRec, int bTryForInt){
254   double rValue;
255   i64 iValue;
256   u8 enc = pRec->enc;
257   assert( (pRec->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Int|MEM_Real))==MEM_Str );
258   if( sqlite3AtoF(pRec->z, &rValue, pRec->n, enc)==0 ) return;
259   if( 0==sqlite3Atoi64(pRec->z, &iValue, pRec->n, enc) ){
260     pRec->u.i = iValue;
261     pRec->flags |= MEM_Int;
262   }else{
263     pRec->u.r = rValue;
264     pRec->flags |= MEM_Real;
265     if( bTryForInt ) sqlite3VdbeIntegerAffinity(pRec);
266   }
267 }
268 
269 /*
270 ** Processing is determine by the affinity parameter:
271 **
272 ** SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER:
273 ** SQLITE_AFF_REAL:
274 ** SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC:
275 **    Try to convert pRec to an integer representation or a
276 **    floating-point representation if an integer representation
277 **    is not possible.  Note that the integer representation is
278 **    always preferred, even if the affinity is REAL, because
279 **    an integer representation is more space efficient on disk.
280 **
281 ** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT:
282 **    Convert pRec to a text representation.
283 **
284 ** SQLITE_AFF_BLOB:
285 **    No-op.  pRec is unchanged.
286 */
287 static void applyAffinity(
288   Mem *pRec,          /* The value to apply affinity to */
289   char affinity,      /* The affinity to be applied */
290   u8 enc              /* Use this text encoding */
291 ){
292   if( affinity>=SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC ){
293     assert( affinity==SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER || affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL
294              || affinity==SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC );
295     if( (pRec->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/
296       if( (pRec->flags & MEM_Real)==0 ){
297         if( pRec->flags & MEM_Str ) applyNumericAffinity(pRec,1);
298       }else{
299         sqlite3VdbeIntegerAffinity(pRec);
300       }
301     }
302   }else if( affinity==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ){
303     /* Only attempt the conversion to TEXT if there is an integer or real
304     ** representation (blob and NULL do not get converted) but no string
305     ** representation.  It would be harmless to repeat the conversion if
306     ** there is already a string rep, but it is pointless to waste those
307     ** CPU cycles. */
308     if( 0==(pRec->flags&MEM_Str) ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/
309       if( (pRec->flags&(MEM_Real|MEM_Int)) ){
310         sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(pRec, enc, 1);
311       }
312     }
313     pRec->flags &= ~(MEM_Real|MEM_Int);
314   }
315 }
316 
317 /*
318 ** Try to convert the type of a function argument or a result column
319 ** into a numeric representation.  Use either INTEGER or REAL whichever
320 ** is appropriate.  But only do the conversion if it is possible without
321 ** loss of information and return the revised type of the argument.
322 */
323 int sqlite3_value_numeric_type(sqlite3_value *pVal){
324   int eType = sqlite3_value_type(pVal);
325   if( eType==SQLITE_TEXT ){
326     Mem *pMem = (Mem*)pVal;
327     applyNumericAffinity(pMem, 0);
328     eType = sqlite3_value_type(pVal);
329   }
330   return eType;
331 }
332 
333 /*
334 ** Exported version of applyAffinity(). This one works on sqlite3_value*,
335 ** not the internal Mem* type.
336 */
337 void sqlite3ValueApplyAffinity(
338   sqlite3_value *pVal,
339   u8 affinity,
340   u8 enc
341 ){
342   applyAffinity((Mem *)pVal, affinity, enc);
343 }
344 
345 /*
346 ** pMem currently only holds a string type (or maybe a BLOB that we can
347 ** interpret as a string if we want to).  Compute its corresponding
348 ** numeric type, if has one.  Set the pMem->u.r and pMem->u.i fields
349 ** accordingly.
350 */
351 static u16 SQLITE_NOINLINE computeNumericType(Mem *pMem){
352   assert( (pMem->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real))==0 );
353   assert( (pMem->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))!=0 );
354   if( sqlite3AtoF(pMem->z, &pMem->u.r, pMem->n, pMem->enc)==0 ){
355     return 0;
356   }
357   if( sqlite3Atoi64(pMem->z, &pMem->u.i, pMem->n, pMem->enc)==SQLITE_OK ){
358     return MEM_Int;
359   }
360   return MEM_Real;
361 }
362 
363 /*
364 ** Return the numeric type for pMem, either MEM_Int or MEM_Real or both or
365 ** none.
366 **
367 ** Unlike applyNumericAffinity(), this routine does not modify pMem->flags.
368 ** But it does set pMem->u.r and pMem->u.i appropriately.
369 */
370 static u16 numericType(Mem *pMem){
371   if( pMem->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real) ){
372     return pMem->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real);
373   }
374   if( pMem->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob) ){
375     return computeNumericType(pMem);
376   }
377   return 0;
378 }
379 
380 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
381 /*
382 ** Write a nice string representation of the contents of cell pMem
383 ** into buffer zBuf, length nBuf.
384 */
385 void sqlite3VdbeMemPrettyPrint(Mem *pMem, char *zBuf){
386   char *zCsr = zBuf;
387   int f = pMem->flags;
388 
389   static const char *const encnames[] = {"(X)", "(8)", "(16LE)", "(16BE)"};
390 
391   if( f&MEM_Blob ){
392     int i;
393     char c;
394     if( f & MEM_Dyn ){
395       c = 'z';
396       assert( (f & (MEM_Static|MEM_Ephem))==0 );
397     }else if( f & MEM_Static ){
398       c = 't';
399       assert( (f & (MEM_Dyn|MEM_Ephem))==0 );
400     }else if( f & MEM_Ephem ){
401       c = 'e';
402       assert( (f & (MEM_Static|MEM_Dyn))==0 );
403     }else{
404       c = 's';
405     }
406 
407     sqlite3_snprintf(100, zCsr, "%c", c);
408     zCsr += sqlite3Strlen30(zCsr);
409     sqlite3_snprintf(100, zCsr, "%d[", pMem->n);
410     zCsr += sqlite3Strlen30(zCsr);
411     for(i=0; i<16 && i<pMem->n; i++){
412       sqlite3_snprintf(100, zCsr, "%02X", ((int)pMem->z[i] & 0xFF));
413       zCsr += sqlite3Strlen30(zCsr);
414     }
415     for(i=0; i<16 && i<pMem->n; i++){
416       char z = pMem->z[i];
417       if( z<32 || z>126 ) *zCsr++ = '.';
418       else *zCsr++ = z;
419     }
420 
421     sqlite3_snprintf(100, zCsr, "]%s", encnames[pMem->enc]);
422     zCsr += sqlite3Strlen30(zCsr);
423     if( f & MEM_Zero ){
424       sqlite3_snprintf(100, zCsr,"+%dz",pMem->u.nZero);
425       zCsr += sqlite3Strlen30(zCsr);
426     }
427     *zCsr = '\0';
428   }else if( f & MEM_Str ){
429     int j, k;
430     zBuf[0] = ' ';
431     if( f & MEM_Dyn ){
432       zBuf[1] = 'z';
433       assert( (f & (MEM_Static|MEM_Ephem))==0 );
434     }else if( f & MEM_Static ){
435       zBuf[1] = 't';
436       assert( (f & (MEM_Dyn|MEM_Ephem))==0 );
437     }else if( f & MEM_Ephem ){
438       zBuf[1] = 'e';
439       assert( (f & (MEM_Static|MEM_Dyn))==0 );
440     }else{
441       zBuf[1] = 's';
442     }
443     k = 2;
444     sqlite3_snprintf(100, &zBuf[k], "%d", pMem->n);
445     k += sqlite3Strlen30(&zBuf[k]);
446     zBuf[k++] = '[';
447     for(j=0; j<15 && j<pMem->n; j++){
448       u8 c = pMem->z[j];
449       if( c>=0x20 && c<0x7f ){
450         zBuf[k++] = c;
451       }else{
452         zBuf[k++] = '.';
453       }
454     }
455     zBuf[k++] = ']';
456     sqlite3_snprintf(100,&zBuf[k], encnames[pMem->enc]);
457     k += sqlite3Strlen30(&zBuf[k]);
458     zBuf[k++] = 0;
459   }
460 }
461 #endif
462 
463 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
464 /*
465 ** Print the value of a register for tracing purposes:
466 */
467 static void memTracePrint(Mem *p){
468   if( p->flags & MEM_Undefined ){
469     printf(" undefined");
470   }else if( p->flags & MEM_Null ){
471     printf(" NULL");
472   }else if( (p->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Str))==(MEM_Int|MEM_Str) ){
473     printf(" si:%lld", p->u.i);
474   }else if( p->flags & MEM_Int ){
475     printf(" i:%lld", p->u.i);
476 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT
477   }else if( p->flags & MEM_Real ){
478     printf(" r:%g", p->u.r);
479 #endif
480   }else if( p->flags & MEM_RowSet ){
481     printf(" (rowset)");
482   }else{
483     char zBuf[200];
484     sqlite3VdbeMemPrettyPrint(p, zBuf);
485     printf(" %s", zBuf);
486   }
487   if( p->flags & MEM_Subtype ) printf(" subtype=0x%02x", p->eSubtype);
488 }
489 static void registerTrace(int iReg, Mem *p){
490   printf("REG[%d] = ", iReg);
491   memTracePrint(p);
492   printf("\n");
493 }
494 #endif
495 
496 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
497 #  define REGISTER_TRACE(R,M) if(db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace)registerTrace(R,M)
498 #else
499 #  define REGISTER_TRACE(R,M)
500 #endif
501 
502 
503 #ifdef VDBE_PROFILE
504 
505 /*
506 ** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing
507 ** high-performance timing routines.
508 */
509 #include "hwtime.h"
510 
511 #endif
512 
513 #ifndef NDEBUG
514 /*
515 ** This function is only called from within an assert() expression. It
516 ** checks that the sqlite3.nTransaction variable is correctly set to
517 ** the number of non-transaction savepoints currently in the
518 ** linked list starting at sqlite3.pSavepoint.
519 **
520 ** Usage:
521 **
522 **     assert( checkSavepointCount(db) );
523 */
524 static int checkSavepointCount(sqlite3 *db){
525   int n = 0;
526   Savepoint *p;
527   for(p=db->pSavepoint; p; p=p->pNext) n++;
528   assert( n==(db->nSavepoint + db->isTransactionSavepoint) );
529   return 1;
530 }
531 #endif
532 
533 /*
534 ** Return the register of pOp->p2 after first preparing it to be
535 ** overwritten with an integer value.
536 */
537 static SQLITE_NOINLINE Mem *out2PrereleaseWithClear(Mem *pOut){
538   sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut);
539   pOut->flags = MEM_Int;
540   return pOut;
541 }
542 static Mem *out2Prerelease(Vdbe *p, VdbeOp *pOp){
543   Mem *pOut;
544   assert( pOp->p2>0 );
545   assert( pOp->p2<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) );
546   pOut = &p->aMem[pOp->p2];
547   memAboutToChange(p, pOut);
548   if( VdbeMemDynamic(pOut) ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/
549     return out2PrereleaseWithClear(pOut);
550   }else{
551     pOut->flags = MEM_Int;
552     return pOut;
553   }
554 }
555 
556 
557 /*
558 ** Execute as much of a VDBE program as we can.
559 ** This is the core of sqlite3_step().
560 */
561 int sqlite3VdbeExec(
562   Vdbe *p                    /* The VDBE */
563 ){
564   Op *aOp = p->aOp;          /* Copy of p->aOp */
565   Op *pOp = aOp;             /* Current operation */
566 #if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) || defined(VDBE_PROFILE)
567   Op *pOrigOp;               /* Value of pOp at the top of the loop */
568 #endif
569 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
570   int nExtraDelete = 0;      /* Verifies FORDELETE and AUXDELETE flags */
571 #endif
572   int rc = SQLITE_OK;        /* Value to return */
573   sqlite3 *db = p->db;       /* The database */
574   u8 resetSchemaOnFault = 0; /* Reset schema after an error if positive */
575   u8 encoding = ENC(db);     /* The database encoding */
576   int iCompare = 0;          /* Result of last comparison */
577   unsigned nVmStep = 0;      /* Number of virtual machine steps */
578 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PROGRESS_CALLBACK
579   unsigned nProgressLimit = 0;/* Invoke xProgress() when nVmStep reaches this */
580 #endif
581   Mem *aMem = p->aMem;       /* Copy of p->aMem */
582   Mem *pIn1 = 0;             /* 1st input operand */
583   Mem *pIn2 = 0;             /* 2nd input operand */
584   Mem *pIn3 = 0;             /* 3rd input operand */
585   Mem *pOut = 0;             /* Output operand */
586 #ifdef VDBE_PROFILE
587   u64 start;                 /* CPU clock count at start of opcode */
588 #endif
589   /*** INSERT STACK UNION HERE ***/
590 
591   assert( p->magic==VDBE_MAGIC_RUN );  /* sqlite3_step() verifies this */
592   sqlite3VdbeEnter(p);
593   if( p->rc==SQLITE_NOMEM ){
594     /* This happens if a malloc() inside a call to sqlite3_column_text() or
595     ** sqlite3_column_text16() failed.  */
596     goto no_mem;
597   }
598   assert( p->rc==SQLITE_OK || (p->rc&0xff)==SQLITE_BUSY );
599   assert( p->bIsReader || p->readOnly!=0 );
600   p->rc = SQLITE_OK;
601   p->iCurrentTime = 0;
602   assert( p->explain==0 );
603   p->pResultSet = 0;
604   db->busyHandler.nBusy = 0;
605   if( db->u1.isInterrupted ) goto abort_due_to_interrupt;
606   sqlite3VdbeIOTraceSql(p);
607 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PROGRESS_CALLBACK
608   if( db->xProgress ){
609     u32 iPrior = p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP];
610     assert( 0 < db->nProgressOps );
611     nProgressLimit = db->nProgressOps - (iPrior % db->nProgressOps);
612   }
613 #endif
614 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
615   sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc();
616   if( p->pc==0
617    && (p->db->flags & (SQLITE_VdbeListing|SQLITE_VdbeEQP|SQLITE_VdbeTrace))!=0
618   ){
619     int i;
620     int once = 1;
621     sqlite3VdbePrintSql(p);
622     if( p->db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeListing ){
623       printf("VDBE Program Listing:\n");
624       for(i=0; i<p->nOp; i++){
625         sqlite3VdbePrintOp(stdout, i, &aOp[i]);
626       }
627     }
628     if( p->db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeEQP ){
629       for(i=0; i<p->nOp; i++){
630         if( aOp[i].opcode==OP_Explain ){
631           if( once ) printf("VDBE Query Plan:\n");
632           printf("%s\n", aOp[i].p4.z);
633           once = 0;
634         }
635       }
636     }
637     if( p->db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeTrace )  printf("VDBE Trace:\n");
638   }
639   sqlite3EndBenignMalloc();
640 #endif
641   for(pOp=&aOp[p->pc]; 1; pOp++){
642     /* Errors are detected by individual opcodes, with an immediate
643     ** jumps to abort_due_to_error. */
644     assert( rc==SQLITE_OK );
645 
646     assert( pOp>=aOp && pOp<&aOp[p->nOp]);
647 #ifdef VDBE_PROFILE
648     start = sqlite3Hwtime();
649 #endif
650     nVmStep++;
651 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS
652     if( p->anExec ) p->anExec[(int)(pOp-aOp)]++;
653 #endif
654 
655     /* Only allow tracing if SQLITE_DEBUG is defined.
656     */
657 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
658     if( db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){
659       sqlite3VdbePrintOp(stdout, (int)(pOp - aOp), pOp);
660     }
661 #endif
662 
663 
664     /* Check to see if we need to simulate an interrupt.  This only happens
665     ** if we have a special test build.
666     */
667 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST
668     if( sqlite3_interrupt_count>0 ){
669       sqlite3_interrupt_count--;
670       if( sqlite3_interrupt_count==0 ){
671         sqlite3_interrupt(db);
672       }
673     }
674 #endif
675 
676     /* Sanity checking on other operands */
677 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
678     {
679       u8 opProperty = sqlite3OpcodeProperty[pOp->opcode];
680       if( (opProperty & OPFLG_IN1)!=0 ){
681         assert( pOp->p1>0 );
682         assert( pOp->p1<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) );
683         assert( memIsValid(&aMem[pOp->p1]) );
684         assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(&aMem[pOp->p1]) );
685         REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1, &aMem[pOp->p1]);
686       }
687       if( (opProperty & OPFLG_IN2)!=0 ){
688         assert( pOp->p2>0 );
689         assert( pOp->p2<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) );
690         assert( memIsValid(&aMem[pOp->p2]) );
691         assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(&aMem[pOp->p2]) );
692         REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2, &aMem[pOp->p2]);
693       }
694       if( (opProperty & OPFLG_IN3)!=0 ){
695         assert( pOp->p3>0 );
696         assert( pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) );
697         assert( memIsValid(&aMem[pOp->p3]) );
698         assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(&aMem[pOp->p3]) );
699         REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, &aMem[pOp->p3]);
700       }
701       if( (opProperty & OPFLG_OUT2)!=0 ){
702         assert( pOp->p2>0 );
703         assert( pOp->p2<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) );
704         memAboutToChange(p, &aMem[pOp->p2]);
705       }
706       if( (opProperty & OPFLG_OUT3)!=0 ){
707         assert( pOp->p3>0 );
708         assert( pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) );
709         memAboutToChange(p, &aMem[pOp->p3]);
710       }
711     }
712 #endif
713 #if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) || defined(VDBE_PROFILE)
714     pOrigOp = pOp;
715 #endif
716 
717     switch( pOp->opcode ){
718 
719 /*****************************************************************************
720 ** What follows is a massive switch statement where each case implements a
721 ** separate instruction in the virtual machine.  If we follow the usual
722 ** indentation conventions, each case should be indented by 6 spaces.  But
723 ** that is a lot of wasted space on the left margin.  So the code within
724 ** the switch statement will break with convention and be flush-left. Another
725 ** big comment (similar to this one) will mark the point in the code where
726 ** we transition back to normal indentation.
727 **
728 ** The formatting of each case is important.  The makefile for SQLite
729 ** generates two C files "opcodes.h" and "opcodes.c" by scanning this
730 ** file looking for lines that begin with "case OP_".  The opcodes.h files
731 ** will be filled with #defines that give unique integer values to each
732 ** opcode and the opcodes.c file is filled with an array of strings where
733 ** each string is the symbolic name for the corresponding opcode.  If the
734 ** case statement is followed by a comment of the form "/# same as ... #/"
735 ** that comment is used to determine the particular value of the opcode.
736 **
737 ** Other keywords in the comment that follows each case are used to
738 ** construct the OPFLG_INITIALIZER value that initializes opcodeProperty[].
739 ** Keywords include: in1, in2, in3, out2, out3.  See
740 ** the mkopcodeh.awk script for additional information.
741 **
742 ** Documentation about VDBE opcodes is generated by scanning this file
743 ** for lines of that contain "Opcode:".  That line and all subsequent
744 ** comment lines are used in the generation of the opcode.html documentation
745 ** file.
746 **
747 ** SUMMARY:
748 **
749 **     Formatting is important to scripts that scan this file.
750 **     Do not deviate from the formatting style currently in use.
751 **
752 *****************************************************************************/
753 
754 /* Opcode:  Goto * P2 * * *
755 **
756 ** An unconditional jump to address P2.
757 ** The next instruction executed will be
758 ** the one at index P2 from the beginning of
759 ** the program.
760 **
761 ** The P1 parameter is not actually used by this opcode.  However, it
762 ** is sometimes set to 1 instead of 0 as a hint to the command-line shell
763 ** that this Goto is the bottom of a loop and that the lines from P2 down
764 ** to the current line should be indented for EXPLAIN output.
765 */
766 case OP_Goto: {             /* jump */
767 jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt:
768   pOp = &aOp[pOp->p2 - 1];
769 
770   /* Opcodes that are used as the bottom of a loop (OP_Next, OP_Prev,
771   ** OP_VNext, OP_RowSetNext, or OP_SorterNext) all jump here upon
772   ** completion.  Check to see if sqlite3_interrupt() has been called
773   ** or if the progress callback needs to be invoked.
774   **
775   ** This code uses unstructured "goto" statements and does not look clean.
776   ** But that is not due to sloppy coding habits. The code is written this
777   ** way for performance, to avoid having to run the interrupt and progress
778   ** checks on every opcode.  This helps sqlite3_step() to run about 1.5%
779   ** faster according to "valgrind --tool=cachegrind" */
780 check_for_interrupt:
781   if( db->u1.isInterrupted ) goto abort_due_to_interrupt;
782 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PROGRESS_CALLBACK
783   /* Call the progress callback if it is configured and the required number
784   ** of VDBE ops have been executed (either since this invocation of
785   ** sqlite3VdbeExec() or since last time the progress callback was called).
786   ** If the progress callback returns non-zero, exit the virtual machine with
787   ** a return code SQLITE_ABORT.
788   */
789   if( db->xProgress!=0 && nVmStep>=nProgressLimit ){
790     assert( db->nProgressOps!=0 );
791     nProgressLimit = nVmStep + db->nProgressOps - (nVmStep%db->nProgressOps);
792     if( db->xProgress(db->pProgressArg) ){
793       rc = SQLITE_INTERRUPT;
794       goto abort_due_to_error;
795     }
796   }
797 #endif
798 
799   break;
800 }
801 
802 /* Opcode:  Gosub P1 P2 * * *
803 **
804 ** Write the current address onto register P1
805 ** and then jump to address P2.
806 */
807 case OP_Gosub: {            /* jump */
808   assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) );
809   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
810   assert( VdbeMemDynamic(pIn1)==0 );
811   memAboutToChange(p, pIn1);
812   pIn1->flags = MEM_Int;
813   pIn1->u.i = (int)(pOp-aOp);
814   REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1, pIn1);
815 
816   /* Most jump operations do a goto to this spot in order to update
817   ** the pOp pointer. */
818 jump_to_p2:
819   pOp = &aOp[pOp->p2 - 1];
820   break;
821 }
822 
823 /* Opcode:  Return P1 * * * *
824 **
825 ** Jump to the next instruction after the address in register P1.  After
826 ** the jump, register P1 becomes undefined.
827 */
828 case OP_Return: {           /* in1 */
829   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
830   assert( pIn1->flags==MEM_Int );
831   pOp = &aOp[pIn1->u.i];
832   pIn1->flags = MEM_Undefined;
833   break;
834 }
835 
836 /* Opcode: InitCoroutine P1 P2 P3 * *
837 **
838 ** Set up register P1 so that it will Yield to the coroutine
839 ** located at address P3.
840 **
841 ** If P2!=0 then the coroutine implementation immediately follows
842 ** this opcode.  So jump over the coroutine implementation to
843 ** address P2.
844 **
845 ** See also: EndCoroutine
846 */
847 case OP_InitCoroutine: {     /* jump */
848   assert( pOp->p1>0 &&  pOp->p1<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) );
849   assert( pOp->p2>=0 && pOp->p2<p->nOp );
850   assert( pOp->p3>=0 && pOp->p3<p->nOp );
851   pOut = &aMem[pOp->p1];
852   assert( !VdbeMemDynamic(pOut) );
853   pOut->u.i = pOp->p3 - 1;
854   pOut->flags = MEM_Int;
855   if( pOp->p2 ) goto jump_to_p2;
856   break;
857 }
858 
859 /* Opcode:  EndCoroutine P1 * * * *
860 **
861 ** The instruction at the address in register P1 is a Yield.
862 ** Jump to the P2 parameter of that Yield.
863 ** After the jump, register P1 becomes undefined.
864 **
865 ** See also: InitCoroutine
866 */
867 case OP_EndCoroutine: {           /* in1 */
868   VdbeOp *pCaller;
869   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
870   assert( pIn1->flags==MEM_Int );
871   assert( pIn1->u.i>=0 && pIn1->u.i<p->nOp );
872   pCaller = &aOp[pIn1->u.i];
873   assert( pCaller->opcode==OP_Yield );
874   assert( pCaller->p2>=0 && pCaller->p2<p->nOp );
875   pOp = &aOp[pCaller->p2 - 1];
876   pIn1->flags = MEM_Undefined;
877   break;
878 }
879 
880 /* Opcode:  Yield P1 P2 * * *
881 **
882 ** Swap the program counter with the value in register P1.  This
883 ** has the effect of yielding to a coroutine.
884 **
885 ** If the coroutine that is launched by this instruction ends with
886 ** Yield or Return then continue to the next instruction.  But if
887 ** the coroutine launched by this instruction ends with
888 ** EndCoroutine, then jump to P2 rather than continuing with the
889 ** next instruction.
890 **
891 ** See also: InitCoroutine
892 */
893 case OP_Yield: {            /* in1, jump */
894   int pcDest;
895   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
896   assert( VdbeMemDynamic(pIn1)==0 );
897   pIn1->flags = MEM_Int;
898   pcDest = (int)pIn1->u.i;
899   pIn1->u.i = (int)(pOp - aOp);
900   REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1, pIn1);
901   pOp = &aOp[pcDest];
902   break;
903 }
904 
905 /* Opcode:  HaltIfNull  P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
906 ** Synopsis: if r[P3]=null halt
907 **
908 ** Check the value in register P3.  If it is NULL then Halt using
909 ** parameter P1, P2, and P4 as if this were a Halt instruction.  If the
910 ** value in register P3 is not NULL, then this routine is a no-op.
911 ** The P5 parameter should be 1.
912 */
913 case OP_HaltIfNull: {      /* in3 */
914   pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3];
915   if( (pIn3->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ) break;
916   /* Fall through into OP_Halt */
917 }
918 
919 /* Opcode:  Halt P1 P2 * P4 P5
920 **
921 ** Exit immediately.  All open cursors, etc are closed
922 ** automatically.
923 **
924 ** P1 is the result code returned by sqlite3_exec(), sqlite3_reset(),
925 ** or sqlite3_finalize().  For a normal halt, this should be SQLITE_OK (0).
926 ** For errors, it can be some other value.  If P1!=0 then P2 will determine
927 ** whether or not to rollback the current transaction.  Do not rollback
928 ** if P2==OE_Fail. Do the rollback if P2==OE_Rollback.  If P2==OE_Abort,
929 ** then back out all changes that have occurred during this execution of the
930 ** VDBE, but do not rollback the transaction.
931 **
932 ** If P4 is not null then it is an error message string.
933 **
934 ** P5 is a value between 0 and 4, inclusive, that modifies the P4 string.
935 **
936 **    0:  (no change)
937 **    1:  NOT NULL contraint failed: P4
938 **    2:  UNIQUE constraint failed: P4
939 **    3:  CHECK constraint failed: P4
940 **    4:  FOREIGN KEY constraint failed: P4
941 **
942 ** If P5 is not zero and P4 is NULL, then everything after the ":" is
943 ** omitted.
944 **
945 ** There is an implied "Halt 0 0 0" instruction inserted at the very end of
946 ** every program.  So a jump past the last instruction of the program
947 ** is the same as executing Halt.
948 */
949 case OP_Halt: {
950   VdbeFrame *pFrame;
951   int pcx;
952 
953   pcx = (int)(pOp - aOp);
954   if( pOp->p1==SQLITE_OK && p->pFrame ){
955     /* Halt the sub-program. Return control to the parent frame. */
956     pFrame = p->pFrame;
957     p->pFrame = pFrame->pParent;
958     p->nFrame--;
959     sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(db, p->nChange);
960     pcx = sqlite3VdbeFrameRestore(pFrame);
961     if( pOp->p2==OE_Ignore ){
962       /* Instruction pcx is the OP_Program that invoked the sub-program
963       ** currently being halted. If the p2 instruction of this OP_Halt
964       ** instruction is set to OE_Ignore, then the sub-program is throwing
965       ** an IGNORE exception. In this case jump to the address specified
966       ** as the p2 of the calling OP_Program.  */
967       pcx = p->aOp[pcx].p2-1;
968     }
969     aOp = p->aOp;
970     aMem = p->aMem;
971     pOp = &aOp[pcx];
972     break;
973   }
974   p->rc = pOp->p1;
975   p->errorAction = (u8)pOp->p2;
976   p->pc = pcx;
977   assert( pOp->p5<=4 );
978   if( p->rc ){
979     if( pOp->p5 ){
980       static const char * const azType[] = { "NOT NULL", "UNIQUE", "CHECK",
981                                              "FOREIGN KEY" };
982       testcase( pOp->p5==1 );
983       testcase( pOp->p5==2 );
984       testcase( pOp->p5==3 );
985       testcase( pOp->p5==4 );
986       sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s constraint failed", azType[pOp->p5-1]);
987       if( pOp->p4.z ){
988         p->zErrMsg = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%z: %s", p->zErrMsg, pOp->p4.z);
989       }
990     }else{
991       sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", pOp->p4.z);
992     }
993     sqlite3_log(pOp->p1, "abort at %d in [%s]: %s", pcx, p->zSql, p->zErrMsg);
994   }
995   rc = sqlite3VdbeHalt(p);
996   assert( rc==SQLITE_BUSY || rc==SQLITE_OK || rc==SQLITE_ERROR );
997   if( rc==SQLITE_BUSY ){
998     p->rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
999   }else{
1000     assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || (p->rc&0xff)==SQLITE_CONSTRAINT );
1001     assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || db->nDeferredCons>0 || db->nDeferredImmCons>0 );
1002     rc = p->rc ? SQLITE_ERROR : SQLITE_DONE;
1003   }
1004   goto vdbe_return;
1005 }
1006 
1007 /* Opcode: Integer P1 P2 * * *
1008 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=P1
1009 **
1010 ** The 32-bit integer value P1 is written into register P2.
1011 */
1012 case OP_Integer: {         /* out2 */
1013   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
1014   pOut->u.i = pOp->p1;
1015   break;
1016 }
1017 
1018 /* Opcode: Int64 * P2 * P4 *
1019 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=P4
1020 **
1021 ** P4 is a pointer to a 64-bit integer value.
1022 ** Write that value into register P2.
1023 */
1024 case OP_Int64: {           /* out2 */
1025   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
1026   assert( pOp->p4.pI64!=0 );
1027   pOut->u.i = *pOp->p4.pI64;
1028   break;
1029 }
1030 
1031 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT
1032 /* Opcode: Real * P2 * P4 *
1033 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=P4
1034 **
1035 ** P4 is a pointer to a 64-bit floating point value.
1036 ** Write that value into register P2.
1037 */
1038 case OP_Real: {            /* same as TK_FLOAT, out2 */
1039   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
1040   pOut->flags = MEM_Real;
1041   assert( !sqlite3IsNaN(*pOp->p4.pReal) );
1042   pOut->u.r = *pOp->p4.pReal;
1043   break;
1044 }
1045 #endif
1046 
1047 /* Opcode: String8 * P2 * P4 *
1048 ** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4'
1049 **
1050 ** P4 points to a nul terminated UTF-8 string. This opcode is transformed
1051 ** into a String opcode before it is executed for the first time.  During
1052 ** this transformation, the length of string P4 is computed and stored
1053 ** as the P1 parameter.
1054 */
1055 case OP_String8: {         /* same as TK_STRING, out2 */
1056   assert( pOp->p4.z!=0 );
1057   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
1058   pOp->opcode = OP_String;
1059   pOp->p1 = sqlite3Strlen30(pOp->p4.z);
1060 
1061 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
1062   if( encoding!=SQLITE_UTF8 ){
1063     rc = sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pOut, pOp->p4.z, -1, SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_STATIC);
1064     assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || rc==SQLITE_TOOBIG );
1065     if( SQLITE_OK!=sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pOut, encoding) ) goto no_mem;
1066     assert( pOut->szMalloc>0 && pOut->zMalloc==pOut->z );
1067     assert( VdbeMemDynamic(pOut)==0 );
1068     pOut->szMalloc = 0;
1069     pOut->flags |= MEM_Static;
1070     if( pOp->p4type==P4_DYNAMIC ){
1071       sqlite3DbFree(db, pOp->p4.z);
1072     }
1073     pOp->p4type = P4_DYNAMIC;
1074     pOp->p4.z = pOut->z;
1075     pOp->p1 = pOut->n;
1076   }
1077   testcase( rc==SQLITE_TOOBIG );
1078 #endif
1079   if( pOp->p1>db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ){
1080     goto too_big;
1081   }
1082   assert( rc==SQLITE_OK );
1083   /* Fall through to the next case, OP_String */
1084 }
1085 
1086 /* Opcode: String P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
1087 ** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4' (len=P1)
1088 **
1089 ** The string value P4 of length P1 (bytes) is stored in register P2.
1090 **
1091 ** If P3 is not zero and the content of register P3 is equal to P5, then
1092 ** the datatype of the register P2 is converted to BLOB.  The content is
1093 ** the same sequence of bytes, it is merely interpreted as a BLOB instead
1094 ** of a string, as if it had been CAST.  In other words:
1095 **
1096 ** if( P3!=0 and reg[P3]==P5 ) reg[P2] := CAST(reg[P2] as BLOB)
1097 */
1098 case OP_String: {          /* out2 */
1099   assert( pOp->p4.z!=0 );
1100   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
1101   pOut->flags = MEM_Str|MEM_Static|MEM_Term;
1102   pOut->z = pOp->p4.z;
1103   pOut->n = pOp->p1;
1104   pOut->enc = encoding;
1105   UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut);
1106 #ifndef SQLITE_LIKE_DOESNT_MATCH_BLOBS
1107   if( pOp->p3>0 ){
1108     assert( pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) );
1109     pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3];
1110     assert( pIn3->flags & MEM_Int );
1111     if( pIn3->u.i==pOp->p5 ) pOut->flags = MEM_Blob|MEM_Static|MEM_Term;
1112   }
1113 #endif
1114   break;
1115 }
1116 
1117 /* Opcode: Null P1 P2 P3 * *
1118 ** Synopsis: r[P2..P3]=NULL
1119 **
1120 ** Write a NULL into registers P2.  If P3 greater than P2, then also write
1121 ** NULL into register P3 and every register in between P2 and P3.  If P3
1122 ** is less than P2 (typically P3 is zero) then only register P2 is
1123 ** set to NULL.
1124 **
1125 ** If the P1 value is non-zero, then also set the MEM_Cleared flag so that
1126 ** NULL values will not compare equal even if SQLITE_NULLEQ is set on
1127 ** OP_Ne or OP_Eq.
1128 */
1129 case OP_Null: {           /* out2 */
1130   int cnt;
1131   u16 nullFlag;
1132   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
1133   cnt = pOp->p3-pOp->p2;
1134   assert( pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) );
1135   pOut->flags = nullFlag = pOp->p1 ? (MEM_Null|MEM_Cleared) : MEM_Null;
1136   pOut->n = 0;
1137   while( cnt>0 ){
1138     pOut++;
1139     memAboutToChange(p, pOut);
1140     sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut);
1141     pOut->flags = nullFlag;
1142     pOut->n = 0;
1143     cnt--;
1144   }
1145   break;
1146 }
1147 
1148 /* Opcode: SoftNull P1 * * * *
1149 ** Synopsis: r[P1]=NULL
1150 **
1151 ** Set register P1 to have the value NULL as seen by the OP_MakeRecord
1152 ** instruction, but do not free any string or blob memory associated with
1153 ** the register, so that if the value was a string or blob that was
1154 ** previously copied using OP_SCopy, the copies will continue to be valid.
1155 */
1156 case OP_SoftNull: {
1157   assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) );
1158   pOut = &aMem[pOp->p1];
1159   pOut->flags = (pOut->flags|MEM_Null)&~MEM_Undefined;
1160   break;
1161 }
1162 
1163 /* Opcode: Blob P1 P2 * P4 *
1164 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=P4 (len=P1)
1165 **
1166 ** P4 points to a blob of data P1 bytes long.  Store this
1167 ** blob in register P2.
1168 */
1169 case OP_Blob: {                /* out2 */
1170   assert( pOp->p1 <= SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH );
1171   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
1172   sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pOut, pOp->p4.z, pOp->p1, 0, 0);
1173   pOut->enc = encoding;
1174   UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut);
1175   break;
1176 }
1177 
1178 /* Opcode: Variable P1 P2 * P4 *
1179 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=parameter(P1,P4)
1180 **
1181 ** Transfer the values of bound parameter P1 into register P2
1182 **
1183 ** If the parameter is named, then its name appears in P4.
1184 ** The P4 value is used by sqlite3_bind_parameter_name().
1185 */
1186 case OP_Variable: {            /* out2 */
1187   Mem *pVar;       /* Value being transferred */
1188 
1189   assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=p->nVar );
1190   assert( pOp->p4.z==0 || pOp->p4.z==sqlite3VListNumToName(p->pVList,pOp->p1) );
1191   pVar = &p->aVar[pOp->p1 - 1];
1192   if( sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pVar) ){
1193     goto too_big;
1194   }
1195   pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2];
1196   sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pVar, MEM_Static);
1197   UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut);
1198   break;
1199 }
1200 
1201 /* Opcode: Move P1 P2 P3 * *
1202 ** Synopsis: r[P2@P3]=r[P1@P3]
1203 **
1204 ** Move the P3 values in register P1..P1+P3-1 over into
1205 ** registers P2..P2+P3-1.  Registers P1..P1+P3-1 are
1206 ** left holding a NULL.  It is an error for register ranges
1207 ** P1..P1+P3-1 and P2..P2+P3-1 to overlap.  It is an error
1208 ** for P3 to be less than 1.
1209 */
1210 case OP_Move: {
1211   int n;           /* Number of registers left to copy */
1212   int p1;          /* Register to copy from */
1213   int p2;          /* Register to copy to */
1214 
1215   n = pOp->p3;
1216   p1 = pOp->p1;
1217   p2 = pOp->p2;
1218   assert( n>0 && p1>0 && p2>0 );
1219   assert( p1+n<=p2 || p2+n<=p1 );
1220 
1221   pIn1 = &aMem[p1];
1222   pOut = &aMem[p2];
1223   do{
1224     assert( pOut<=&aMem[(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)] );
1225     assert( pIn1<=&aMem[(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)] );
1226     assert( memIsValid(pIn1) );
1227     memAboutToChange(p, pOut);
1228     sqlite3VdbeMemMove(pOut, pIn1);
1229 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
1230     if( pOut->pScopyFrom>=&aMem[p1] && pOut->pScopyFrom<pOut ){
1231       pOut->pScopyFrom += pOp->p2 - p1;
1232     }
1233 #endif
1234     Deephemeralize(pOut);
1235     REGISTER_TRACE(p2++, pOut);
1236     pIn1++;
1237     pOut++;
1238   }while( --n );
1239   break;
1240 }
1241 
1242 /* Opcode: Copy P1 P2 P3 * *
1243 ** Synopsis: r[P2@P3+1]=r[P1@P3+1]
1244 **
1245 ** Make a copy of registers P1..P1+P3 into registers P2..P2+P3.
1246 **
1247 ** This instruction makes a deep copy of the value.  A duplicate
1248 ** is made of any string or blob constant.  See also OP_SCopy.
1249 */
1250 case OP_Copy: {
1251   int n;
1252 
1253   n = pOp->p3;
1254   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
1255   pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2];
1256   assert( pOut!=pIn1 );
1257   while( 1 ){
1258     sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pIn1, MEM_Ephem);
1259     Deephemeralize(pOut);
1260 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
1261     pOut->pScopyFrom = 0;
1262 #endif
1263     REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2+pOp->p3-n, pOut);
1264     if( (n--)==0 ) break;
1265     pOut++;
1266     pIn1++;
1267   }
1268   break;
1269 }
1270 
1271 /* Opcode: SCopy P1 P2 * * *
1272 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=r[P1]
1273 **
1274 ** Make a shallow copy of register P1 into register P2.
1275 **
1276 ** This instruction makes a shallow copy of the value.  If the value
1277 ** is a string or blob, then the copy is only a pointer to the
1278 ** original and hence if the original changes so will the copy.
1279 ** Worse, if the original is deallocated, the copy becomes invalid.
1280 ** Thus the program must guarantee that the original will not change
1281 ** during the lifetime of the copy.  Use OP_Copy to make a complete
1282 ** copy.
1283 */
1284 case OP_SCopy: {            /* out2 */
1285   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
1286   pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2];
1287   assert( pOut!=pIn1 );
1288   sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pIn1, MEM_Ephem);
1289 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
1290   if( pOut->pScopyFrom==0 ) pOut->pScopyFrom = pIn1;
1291 #endif
1292   break;
1293 }
1294 
1295 /* Opcode: IntCopy P1 P2 * * *
1296 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=r[P1]
1297 **
1298 ** Transfer the integer value held in register P1 into register P2.
1299 **
1300 ** This is an optimized version of SCopy that works only for integer
1301 ** values.
1302 */
1303 case OP_IntCopy: {            /* out2 */
1304   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
1305   assert( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 );
1306   pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2];
1307   sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pOut, pIn1->u.i);
1308   break;
1309 }
1310 
1311 /* Opcode: ResultRow P1 P2 * * *
1312 ** Synopsis: output=r[P1@P2]
1313 **
1314 ** The registers P1 through P1+P2-1 contain a single row of
1315 ** results. This opcode causes the sqlite3_step() call to terminate
1316 ** with an SQLITE_ROW return code and it sets up the sqlite3_stmt
1317 ** structure to provide access to the r(P1)..r(P1+P2-1) values as
1318 ** the result row.
1319 */
1320 case OP_ResultRow: {
1321   Mem *pMem;
1322   int i;
1323   assert( p->nResColumn==pOp->p2 );
1324   assert( pOp->p1>0 );
1325   assert( pOp->p1+pOp->p2<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 );
1326 
1327 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PROGRESS_CALLBACK
1328   /* Run the progress counter just before returning.
1329   */
1330   if( db->xProgress!=0
1331    && nVmStep>=nProgressLimit
1332    && db->xProgress(db->pProgressArg)!=0
1333   ){
1334     rc = SQLITE_INTERRUPT;
1335     goto abort_due_to_error;
1336   }
1337 #endif
1338 
1339   /* If this statement has violated immediate foreign key constraints, do
1340   ** not return the number of rows modified. And do not RELEASE the statement
1341   ** transaction. It needs to be rolled back.  */
1342   if( SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 0)) ){
1343     assert( db->flags&SQLITE_CountRows );
1344     assert( p->usesStmtJournal );
1345     goto abort_due_to_error;
1346   }
1347 
1348   /* If the SQLITE_CountRows flag is set in sqlite3.flags mask, then
1349   ** DML statements invoke this opcode to return the number of rows
1350   ** modified to the user. This is the only way that a VM that
1351   ** opens a statement transaction may invoke this opcode.
1352   **
1353   ** In case this is such a statement, close any statement transaction
1354   ** opened by this VM before returning control to the user. This is to
1355   ** ensure that statement-transactions are always nested, not overlapping.
1356   ** If the open statement-transaction is not closed here, then the user
1357   ** may step another VM that opens its own statement transaction. This
1358   ** may lead to overlapping statement transactions.
1359   **
1360   ** The statement transaction is never a top-level transaction.  Hence
1361   ** the RELEASE call below can never fail.
1362   */
1363   assert( p->iStatement==0 || db->flags&SQLITE_CountRows );
1364   rc = sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement(p, SAVEPOINT_RELEASE);
1365   assert( rc==SQLITE_OK );
1366 
1367   /* Invalidate all ephemeral cursor row caches */
1368   p->cacheCtr = (p->cacheCtr + 2)|1;
1369 
1370   /* Make sure the results of the current row are \000 terminated
1371   ** and have an assigned type.  The results are de-ephemeralized as
1372   ** a side effect.
1373   */
1374   pMem = p->pResultSet = &aMem[pOp->p1];
1375   for(i=0; i<pOp->p2; i++){
1376     assert( memIsValid(&pMem[i]) );
1377     Deephemeralize(&pMem[i]);
1378     assert( (pMem[i].flags & MEM_Ephem)==0
1379             || (pMem[i].flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))==0 );
1380     sqlite3VdbeMemNulTerminate(&pMem[i]);
1381     REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1+i, &pMem[i]);
1382   }
1383   if( db->mallocFailed ) goto no_mem;
1384 
1385   if( db->mTrace & SQLITE_TRACE_ROW ){
1386     db->xTrace(SQLITE_TRACE_ROW, db->pTraceArg, p, 0);
1387   }
1388 
1389   /* Return SQLITE_ROW
1390   */
1391   p->pc = (int)(pOp - aOp) + 1;
1392   rc = SQLITE_ROW;
1393   goto vdbe_return;
1394 }
1395 
1396 /* Opcode: Concat P1 P2 P3 * *
1397 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]+r[P1]
1398 **
1399 ** Add the text in register P1 onto the end of the text in
1400 ** register P2 and store the result in register P3.
1401 ** If either the P1 or P2 text are NULL then store NULL in P3.
1402 **
1403 **   P3 = P2 || P1
1404 **
1405 ** It is illegal for P1 and P3 to be the same register. Sometimes,
1406 ** if P3 is the same register as P2, the implementation is able
1407 ** to avoid a memcpy().
1408 */
1409 case OP_Concat: {           /* same as TK_CONCAT, in1, in2, out3 */
1410   i64 nByte;
1411 
1412   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
1413   pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2];
1414   pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3];
1415   assert( pIn1!=pOut );
1416   if( (pIn1->flags | pIn2->flags) & MEM_Null ){
1417     sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut);
1418     break;
1419   }
1420   if( ExpandBlob(pIn1) || ExpandBlob(pIn2) ) goto no_mem;
1421   Stringify(pIn1, encoding);
1422   Stringify(pIn2, encoding);
1423   nByte = pIn1->n + pIn2->n;
1424   if( nByte>db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ){
1425     goto too_big;
1426   }
1427   if( sqlite3VdbeMemGrow(pOut, (int)nByte+2, pOut==pIn2) ){
1428     goto no_mem;
1429   }
1430   MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Str);
1431   if( pOut!=pIn2 ){
1432     memcpy(pOut->z, pIn2->z, pIn2->n);
1433   }
1434   memcpy(&pOut->z[pIn2->n], pIn1->z, pIn1->n);
1435   pOut->z[nByte]=0;
1436   pOut->z[nByte+1] = 0;
1437   pOut->flags |= MEM_Term;
1438   pOut->n = (int)nByte;
1439   pOut->enc = encoding;
1440   UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut);
1441   break;
1442 }
1443 
1444 /* Opcode: Add P1 P2 P3 * *
1445 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P1]+r[P2]
1446 **
1447 ** Add the value in register P1 to the value in register P2
1448 ** and store the result in register P3.
1449 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL.
1450 */
1451 /* Opcode: Multiply P1 P2 P3 * *
1452 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P1]*r[P2]
1453 **
1454 **
1455 ** Multiply the value in register P1 by the value in register P2
1456 ** and store the result in register P3.
1457 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL.
1458 */
1459 /* Opcode: Subtract P1 P2 P3 * *
1460 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]-r[P1]
1461 **
1462 ** Subtract the value in register P1 from the value in register P2
1463 ** and store the result in register P3.
1464 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL.
1465 */
1466 /* Opcode: Divide P1 P2 P3 * *
1467 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]/r[P1]
1468 **
1469 ** Divide the value in register P1 by the value in register P2
1470 ** and store the result in register P3 (P3=P2/P1). If the value in
1471 ** register P1 is zero, then the result is NULL. If either input is
1472 ** NULL, the result is NULL.
1473 */
1474 /* Opcode: Remainder P1 P2 P3 * *
1475 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]%r[P1]
1476 **
1477 ** Compute the remainder after integer register P2 is divided by
1478 ** register P1 and store the result in register P3.
1479 ** If the value in register P1 is zero the result is NULL.
1480 ** If either operand is NULL, the result is NULL.
1481 */
1482 case OP_Add:                   /* same as TK_PLUS, in1, in2, out3 */
1483 case OP_Subtract:              /* same as TK_MINUS, in1, in2, out3 */
1484 case OP_Multiply:              /* same as TK_STAR, in1, in2, out3 */
1485 case OP_Divide:                /* same as TK_SLASH, in1, in2, out3 */
1486 case OP_Remainder: {           /* same as TK_REM, in1, in2, out3 */
1487   char bIntint;   /* Started out as two integer operands */
1488   u16 flags;      /* Combined MEM_* flags from both inputs */
1489   u16 type1;      /* Numeric type of left operand */
1490   u16 type2;      /* Numeric type of right operand */
1491   i64 iA;         /* Integer value of left operand */
1492   i64 iB;         /* Integer value of right operand */
1493   double rA;      /* Real value of left operand */
1494   double rB;      /* Real value of right operand */
1495 
1496   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
1497   type1 = numericType(pIn1);
1498   pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2];
1499   type2 = numericType(pIn2);
1500   pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3];
1501   flags = pIn1->flags | pIn2->flags;
1502   if( (flags & MEM_Null)!=0 ) goto arithmetic_result_is_null;
1503   if( (type1 & type2 & MEM_Int)!=0 ){
1504     iA = pIn1->u.i;
1505     iB = pIn2->u.i;
1506     bIntint = 1;
1507     switch( pOp->opcode ){
1508       case OP_Add:       if( sqlite3AddInt64(&iB,iA) ) goto fp_math;  break;
1509       case OP_Subtract:  if( sqlite3SubInt64(&iB,iA) ) goto fp_math;  break;
1510       case OP_Multiply:  if( sqlite3MulInt64(&iB,iA) ) goto fp_math;  break;
1511       case OP_Divide: {
1512         if( iA==0 ) goto arithmetic_result_is_null;
1513         if( iA==-1 && iB==SMALLEST_INT64 ) goto fp_math;
1514         iB /= iA;
1515         break;
1516       }
1517       default: {
1518         if( iA==0 ) goto arithmetic_result_is_null;
1519         if( iA==-1 ) iA = 1;
1520         iB %= iA;
1521         break;
1522       }
1523     }
1524     pOut->u.i = iB;
1525     MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int);
1526   }else{
1527     bIntint = 0;
1528 fp_math:
1529     rA = sqlite3VdbeRealValue(pIn1);
1530     rB = sqlite3VdbeRealValue(pIn2);
1531     switch( pOp->opcode ){
1532       case OP_Add:         rB += rA;       break;
1533       case OP_Subtract:    rB -= rA;       break;
1534       case OP_Multiply:    rB *= rA;       break;
1535       case OP_Divide: {
1536         /* (double)0 In case of SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT... */
1537         if( rA==(double)0 ) goto arithmetic_result_is_null;
1538         rB /= rA;
1539         break;
1540       }
1541       default: {
1542         iA = (i64)rA;
1543         iB = (i64)rB;
1544         if( iA==0 ) goto arithmetic_result_is_null;
1545         if( iA==-1 ) iA = 1;
1546         rB = (double)(iB % iA);
1547         break;
1548       }
1549     }
1550 #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT
1551     pOut->u.i = rB;
1552     MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int);
1553 #else
1554     if( sqlite3IsNaN(rB) ){
1555       goto arithmetic_result_is_null;
1556     }
1557     pOut->u.r = rB;
1558     MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Real);
1559     if( ((type1|type2)&MEM_Real)==0 && !bIntint ){
1560       sqlite3VdbeIntegerAffinity(pOut);
1561     }
1562 #endif
1563   }
1564   break;
1565 
1566 arithmetic_result_is_null:
1567   sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut);
1568   break;
1569 }
1570 
1571 /* Opcode: CollSeq P1 * * P4
1572 **
1573 ** P4 is a pointer to a CollSeq struct. If the next call to a user function
1574 ** or aggregate calls sqlite3GetFuncCollSeq(), this collation sequence will
1575 ** be returned. This is used by the built-in min(), max() and nullif()
1576 ** functions.
1577 **
1578 ** If P1 is not zero, then it is a register that a subsequent min() or
1579 ** max() aggregate will set to 1 if the current row is not the minimum or
1580 ** maximum.  The P1 register is initialized to 0 by this instruction.
1581 **
1582 ** The interface used by the implementation of the aforementioned functions
1583 ** to retrieve the collation sequence set by this opcode is not available
1584 ** publicly.  Only built-in functions have access to this feature.
1585 */
1586 case OP_CollSeq: {
1587   assert( pOp->p4type==P4_COLLSEQ );
1588   if( pOp->p1 ){
1589     sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(&aMem[pOp->p1], 0);
1590   }
1591   break;
1592 }
1593 
1594 /* Opcode: Function0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
1595 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=func(r[P2@P5])
1596 **
1597 ** Invoke a user function (P4 is a pointer to a FuncDef object that
1598 ** defines the function) with P5 arguments taken from register P2 and
1599 ** successors.  The result of the function is stored in register P3.
1600 ** Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs.
1601 **
1602 ** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the
1603 ** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first
1604 ** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine
1605 ** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the
1606 ** sqlite3_set_auxdata() API may be safely retained until the next
1607 ** invocation of this opcode.
1608 **
1609 ** See also: Function, AggStep, AggFinal
1610 */
1611 /* Opcode: Function P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
1612 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=func(r[P2@P5])
1613 **
1614 ** Invoke a user function (P4 is a pointer to an sqlite3_context object that
1615 ** contains a pointer to the function to be run) with P5 arguments taken
1616 ** from register P2 and successors.  The result of the function is stored
1617 ** in register P3.  Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs.
1618 **
1619 ** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the
1620 ** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first
1621 ** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine
1622 ** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the
1623 ** sqlite3_set_auxdata() API may be safely retained until the next
1624 ** invocation of this opcode.
1625 **
1626 ** SQL functions are initially coded as OP_Function0 with P4 pointing
1627 ** to a FuncDef object.  But on first evaluation, the P4 operand is
1628 ** automatically converted into an sqlite3_context object and the operation
1629 ** changed to this OP_Function opcode.  In this way, the initialization of
1630 ** the sqlite3_context object occurs only once, rather than once for each
1631 ** evaluation of the function.
1632 **
1633 ** See also: Function0, AggStep, AggFinal
1634 */
1635 case OP_Function0: {
1636   int n;
1637   sqlite3_context *pCtx;
1638 
1639   assert( pOp->p4type==P4_FUNCDEF );
1640   n = pOp->p5;
1641   assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) );
1642   assert( n==0 || (pOp->p2>0 && pOp->p2+n<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1) );
1643   assert( pOp->p3<pOp->p2 || pOp->p3>=pOp->p2+n );
1644   pCtx = sqlite3DbMallocRawNN(db, sizeof(*pCtx) + (n-1)*sizeof(sqlite3_value*));
1645   if( pCtx==0 ) goto no_mem;
1646   pCtx->pOut = 0;
1647   pCtx->pFunc = pOp->p4.pFunc;
1648   pCtx->iOp = (int)(pOp - aOp);
1649   pCtx->pVdbe = p;
1650   pCtx->argc = n;
1651   pOp->p4type = P4_FUNCCTX;
1652   pOp->p4.pCtx = pCtx;
1653   pOp->opcode = OP_Function;
1654   /* Fall through into OP_Function */
1655 }
1656 case OP_Function: {
1657   int i;
1658   sqlite3_context *pCtx;
1659 
1660   assert( pOp->p4type==P4_FUNCCTX );
1661   pCtx = pOp->p4.pCtx;
1662 
1663   /* If this function is inside of a trigger, the register array in aMem[]
1664   ** might change from one evaluation to the next.  The next block of code
1665   ** checks to see if the register array has changed, and if so it
1666   ** reinitializes the relavant parts of the sqlite3_context object */
1667   pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3];
1668   if( pCtx->pOut != pOut ){
1669     pCtx->pOut = pOut;
1670     for(i=pCtx->argc-1; i>=0; i--) pCtx->argv[i] = &aMem[pOp->p2+i];
1671   }
1672 
1673   memAboutToChange(p, pCtx->pOut);
1674 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
1675   for(i=0; i<pCtx->argc; i++){
1676     assert( memIsValid(pCtx->argv[i]) );
1677     REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2+i, pCtx->argv[i]);
1678   }
1679 #endif
1680   MemSetTypeFlag(pCtx->pOut, MEM_Null);
1681   pCtx->fErrorOrAux = 0;
1682   (*pCtx->pFunc->xSFunc)(pCtx, pCtx->argc, pCtx->argv);/* IMP: R-24505-23230 */
1683 
1684   /* If the function returned an error, throw an exception */
1685   if( pCtx->fErrorOrAux ){
1686     if( pCtx->isError ){
1687       sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3_value_text(pCtx->pOut));
1688       rc = pCtx->isError;
1689     }
1690     sqlite3VdbeDeleteAuxData(db, &p->pAuxData, pCtx->iOp, pOp->p1);
1691     if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
1692   }
1693 
1694   /* Copy the result of the function into register P3 */
1695   if( pOut->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob) ){
1696     sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pCtx->pOut, encoding);
1697     if( sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pCtx->pOut) ) goto too_big;
1698   }
1699 
1700   REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pCtx->pOut);
1701   UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pCtx->pOut);
1702   break;
1703 }
1704 
1705 /* Opcode: BitAnd P1 P2 P3 * *
1706 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P1]&r[P2]
1707 **
1708 ** Take the bit-wise AND of the values in register P1 and P2 and
1709 ** store the result in register P3.
1710 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL.
1711 */
1712 /* Opcode: BitOr P1 P2 P3 * *
1713 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P1]|r[P2]
1714 **
1715 ** Take the bit-wise OR of the values in register P1 and P2 and
1716 ** store the result in register P3.
1717 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL.
1718 */
1719 /* Opcode: ShiftLeft P1 P2 P3 * *
1720 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]<<r[P1]
1721 **
1722 ** Shift the integer value in register P2 to the left by the
1723 ** number of bits specified by the integer in register P1.
1724 ** Store the result in register P3.
1725 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL.
1726 */
1727 /* Opcode: ShiftRight P1 P2 P3 * *
1728 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]>>r[P1]
1729 **
1730 ** Shift the integer value in register P2 to the right by the
1731 ** number of bits specified by the integer in register P1.
1732 ** Store the result in register P3.
1733 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL.
1734 */
1735 case OP_BitAnd:                 /* same as TK_BITAND, in1, in2, out3 */
1736 case OP_BitOr:                  /* same as TK_BITOR, in1, in2, out3 */
1737 case OP_ShiftLeft:              /* same as TK_LSHIFT, in1, in2, out3 */
1738 case OP_ShiftRight: {           /* same as TK_RSHIFT, in1, in2, out3 */
1739   i64 iA;
1740   u64 uA;
1741   i64 iB;
1742   u8 op;
1743 
1744   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
1745   pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2];
1746   pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3];
1747   if( (pIn1->flags | pIn2->flags) & MEM_Null ){
1748     sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut);
1749     break;
1750   }
1751   iA = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn2);
1752   iB = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn1);
1753   op = pOp->opcode;
1754   if( op==OP_BitAnd ){
1755     iA &= iB;
1756   }else if( op==OP_BitOr ){
1757     iA |= iB;
1758   }else if( iB!=0 ){
1759     assert( op==OP_ShiftRight || op==OP_ShiftLeft );
1760 
1761     /* If shifting by a negative amount, shift in the other direction */
1762     if( iB<0 ){
1763       assert( OP_ShiftRight==OP_ShiftLeft+1 );
1764       op = 2*OP_ShiftLeft + 1 - op;
1765       iB = iB>(-64) ? -iB : 64;
1766     }
1767 
1768     if( iB>=64 ){
1769       iA = (iA>=0 || op==OP_ShiftLeft) ? 0 : -1;
1770     }else{
1771       memcpy(&uA, &iA, sizeof(uA));
1772       if( op==OP_ShiftLeft ){
1773         uA <<= iB;
1774       }else{
1775         uA >>= iB;
1776         /* Sign-extend on a right shift of a negative number */
1777         if( iA<0 ) uA |= ((((u64)0xffffffff)<<32)|0xffffffff) << (64-iB);
1778       }
1779       memcpy(&iA, &uA, sizeof(iA));
1780     }
1781   }
1782   pOut->u.i = iA;
1783   MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int);
1784   break;
1785 }
1786 
1787 /* Opcode: AddImm  P1 P2 * * *
1788 ** Synopsis: r[P1]=r[P1]+P2
1789 **
1790 ** Add the constant P2 to the value in register P1.
1791 ** The result is always an integer.
1792 **
1793 ** To force any register to be an integer, just add 0.
1794 */
1795 case OP_AddImm: {            /* in1 */
1796   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
1797   memAboutToChange(p, pIn1);
1798   sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pIn1);
1799   pIn1->u.i += pOp->p2;
1800   break;
1801 }
1802 
1803 /* Opcode: MustBeInt P1 P2 * * *
1804 **
1805 ** Force the value in register P1 to be an integer.  If the value
1806 ** in P1 is not an integer and cannot be converted into an integer
1807 ** without data loss, then jump immediately to P2, or if P2==0
1808 ** raise an SQLITE_MISMATCH exception.
1809 */
1810 case OP_MustBeInt: {            /* jump, in1 */
1811   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
1812   if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ){
1813     applyAffinity(pIn1, SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC, encoding);
1814     VdbeBranchTaken((pIn1->flags&MEM_Int)==0, 2);
1815     if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ){
1816       if( pOp->p2==0 ){
1817         rc = SQLITE_MISMATCH;
1818         goto abort_due_to_error;
1819       }else{
1820         goto jump_to_p2;
1821       }
1822     }
1823   }
1824   MemSetTypeFlag(pIn1, MEM_Int);
1825   break;
1826 }
1827 
1828 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT
1829 /* Opcode: RealAffinity P1 * * * *
1830 **
1831 ** If register P1 holds an integer convert it to a real value.
1832 **
1833 ** This opcode is used when extracting information from a column that
1834 ** has REAL affinity.  Such column values may still be stored as
1835 ** integers, for space efficiency, but after extraction we want them
1836 ** to have only a real value.
1837 */
1838 case OP_RealAffinity: {                  /* in1 */
1839   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
1840   if( pIn1->flags & MEM_Int ){
1841     sqlite3VdbeMemRealify(pIn1);
1842   }
1843   break;
1844 }
1845 #endif
1846 
1847 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CAST
1848 /* Opcode: Cast P1 P2 * * *
1849 ** Synopsis: affinity(r[P1])
1850 **
1851 ** Force the value in register P1 to be the type defined by P2.
1852 **
1853 ** <ul>
1854 ** <li value="97"> TEXT
1855 ** <li value="98"> BLOB
1856 ** <li value="99"> NUMERIC
1857 ** <li value="100"> INTEGER
1858 ** <li value="101"> REAL
1859 ** </ul>
1860 **
1861 ** A NULL value is not changed by this routine.  It remains NULL.
1862 */
1863 case OP_Cast: {                  /* in1 */
1864   assert( pOp->p2>=SQLITE_AFF_BLOB && pOp->p2<=SQLITE_AFF_REAL );
1865   testcase( pOp->p2==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT );
1866   testcase( pOp->p2==SQLITE_AFF_BLOB );
1867   testcase( pOp->p2==SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC );
1868   testcase( pOp->p2==SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER );
1869   testcase( pOp->p2==SQLITE_AFF_REAL );
1870   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
1871   memAboutToChange(p, pIn1);
1872   rc = ExpandBlob(pIn1);
1873   sqlite3VdbeMemCast(pIn1, pOp->p2, encoding);
1874   UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pIn1);
1875   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
1876   break;
1877 }
1878 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_CAST */
1879 
1880 /* Opcode: Eq P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
1881 ** Synopsis: IF r[P3]==r[P1]
1882 **
1883 ** Compare the values in register P1 and P3.  If reg(P3)==reg(P1) then
1884 ** jump to address P2.  Or if the SQLITE_STOREP2 flag is set in P5, then
1885 ** store the result of comparison in register P2.
1886 **
1887 ** The SQLITE_AFF_MASK portion of P5 must be an affinity character -
1888 ** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made
1889 ** to coerce both inputs according to this affinity before the
1890 ** comparison is made. If the SQLITE_AFF_MASK is 0x00, then numeric
1891 ** affinity is used. Note that the affinity conversions are stored
1892 ** back into the input registers P1 and P3.  So this opcode can cause
1893 ** persistent changes to registers P1 and P3.
1894 **
1895 ** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL,
1896 ** the values are compared. If both values are blobs then memcmp() is
1897 ** used to determine the results of the comparison.  If both values
1898 ** are text, then the appropriate collating function specified in
1899 ** P4 is used to do the comparison.  If P4 is not specified then
1900 ** memcmp() is used to compare text string.  If both values are
1901 ** numeric, then a numeric comparison is used. If the two values
1902 ** are of different types, then numbers are considered less than
1903 ** strings and strings are considered less than blobs.
1904 **
1905 ** If SQLITE_NULLEQ is set in P5 then the result of comparison is always either
1906 ** true or false and is never NULL.  If both operands are NULL then the result
1907 ** of comparison is true.  If either operand is NULL then the result is false.
1908 ** If neither operand is NULL the result is the same as it would be if
1909 ** the SQLITE_NULLEQ flag were omitted from P5.
1910 **
1911 ** If both SQLITE_STOREP2 and SQLITE_KEEPNULL flags are set then the
1912 ** content of r[P2] is only changed if the new value is NULL or 0 (false).
1913 ** In other words, a prior r[P2] value will not be overwritten by 1 (true).
1914 */
1915 /* Opcode: Ne P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
1916 ** Synopsis: IF r[P3]!=r[P1]
1917 **
1918 ** This works just like the Eq opcode except that the jump is taken if
1919 ** the operands in registers P1 and P3 are not equal.  See the Eq opcode for
1920 ** additional information.
1921 **
1922 ** If both SQLITE_STOREP2 and SQLITE_KEEPNULL flags are set then the
1923 ** content of r[P2] is only changed if the new value is NULL or 1 (true).
1924 ** In other words, a prior r[P2] value will not be overwritten by 0 (false).
1925 */
1926 /* Opcode: Lt P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
1927 ** Synopsis: IF r[P3]<r[P1]
1928 **
1929 ** Compare the values in register P1 and P3.  If reg(P3)<reg(P1) then
1930 ** jump to address P2.  Or if the SQLITE_STOREP2 flag is set in P5 store
1931 ** the result of comparison (0 or 1 or NULL) into register P2.
1932 **
1933 ** If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL bit of P5 is set and either reg(P1) or
1934 ** reg(P3) is NULL then the take the jump.  If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL
1935 ** bit is clear then fall through if either operand is NULL.
1936 **
1937 ** The SQLITE_AFF_MASK portion of P5 must be an affinity character -
1938 ** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made
1939 ** to coerce both inputs according to this affinity before the
1940 ** comparison is made. If the SQLITE_AFF_MASK is 0x00, then numeric
1941 ** affinity is used. Note that the affinity conversions are stored
1942 ** back into the input registers P1 and P3.  So this opcode can cause
1943 ** persistent changes to registers P1 and P3.
1944 **
1945 ** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL,
1946 ** the values are compared. If both values are blobs then memcmp() is
1947 ** used to determine the results of the comparison.  If both values
1948 ** are text, then the appropriate collating function specified in
1949 ** P4 is  used to do the comparison.  If P4 is not specified then
1950 ** memcmp() is used to compare text string.  If both values are
1951 ** numeric, then a numeric comparison is used. If the two values
1952 ** are of different types, then numbers are considered less than
1953 ** strings and strings are considered less than blobs.
1954 */
1955 /* Opcode: Le P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
1956 ** Synopsis: IF r[P3]<=r[P1]
1957 **
1958 ** This works just like the Lt opcode except that the jump is taken if
1959 ** the content of register P3 is less than or equal to the content of
1960 ** register P1.  See the Lt opcode for additional information.
1961 */
1962 /* Opcode: Gt P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
1963 ** Synopsis: IF r[P3]>r[P1]
1964 **
1965 ** This works just like the Lt opcode except that the jump is taken if
1966 ** the content of register P3 is greater than the content of
1967 ** register P1.  See the Lt opcode for additional information.
1968 */
1969 /* Opcode: Ge P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
1970 ** Synopsis: IF r[P3]>=r[P1]
1971 **
1972 ** This works just like the Lt opcode except that the jump is taken if
1973 ** the content of register P3 is greater than or equal to the content of
1974 ** register P1.  See the Lt opcode for additional information.
1975 */
1976 case OP_Eq:               /* same as TK_EQ, jump, in1, in3 */
1977 case OP_Ne:               /* same as TK_NE, jump, in1, in3 */
1978 case OP_Lt:               /* same as TK_LT, jump, in1, in3 */
1979 case OP_Le:               /* same as TK_LE, jump, in1, in3 */
1980 case OP_Gt:               /* same as TK_GT, jump, in1, in3 */
1981 case OP_Ge: {             /* same as TK_GE, jump, in1, in3 */
1982   int res, res2;      /* Result of the comparison of pIn1 against pIn3 */
1983   char affinity;      /* Affinity to use for comparison */
1984   u16 flags1;         /* Copy of initial value of pIn1->flags */
1985   u16 flags3;         /* Copy of initial value of pIn3->flags */
1986 
1987   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
1988   pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3];
1989   flags1 = pIn1->flags;
1990   flags3 = pIn3->flags;
1991   if( (flags1 | flags3)&MEM_Null ){
1992     /* One or both operands are NULL */
1993     if( pOp->p5 & SQLITE_NULLEQ ){
1994       /* If SQLITE_NULLEQ is set (which will only happen if the operator is
1995       ** OP_Eq or OP_Ne) then take the jump or not depending on whether
1996       ** or not both operands are null.
1997       */
1998       assert( pOp->opcode==OP_Eq || pOp->opcode==OP_Ne );
1999       assert( (flags1 & MEM_Cleared)==0 );
2000       assert( (pOp->p5 & SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL)==0 );
2001       if( (flags1&flags3&MEM_Null)!=0
2002        && (flags3&MEM_Cleared)==0
2003       ){
2004         res = 0;  /* Operands are equal */
2005       }else{
2006         res = 1;  /* Operands are not equal */
2007       }
2008     }else{
2009       /* SQLITE_NULLEQ is clear and at least one operand is NULL,
2010       ** then the result is always NULL.
2011       ** The jump is taken if the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL bit is set.
2012       */
2013       if( pOp->p5 & SQLITE_STOREP2 ){
2014         pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2];
2015         iCompare = 1;    /* Operands are not equal */
2016         memAboutToChange(p, pOut);
2017         MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Null);
2018         REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2, pOut);
2019       }else{
2020         VdbeBranchTaken(2,3);
2021         if( pOp->p5 & SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL ){
2022           goto jump_to_p2;
2023         }
2024       }
2025       break;
2026     }
2027   }else{
2028     /* Neither operand is NULL.  Do a comparison. */
2029     affinity = pOp->p5 & SQLITE_AFF_MASK;
2030     if( affinity>=SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC ){
2031       if( (flags1 | flags3)&MEM_Str ){
2032         if( (flags1 & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real|MEM_Str))==MEM_Str ){
2033           applyNumericAffinity(pIn1,0);
2034           testcase( flags3!=pIn3->flags ); /* Possible if pIn1==pIn3 */
2035           flags3 = pIn3->flags;
2036         }
2037         if( (flags3 & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real|MEM_Str))==MEM_Str ){
2038           applyNumericAffinity(pIn3,0);
2039         }
2040       }
2041       /* Handle the common case of integer comparison here, as an
2042       ** optimization, to avoid a call to sqlite3MemCompare() */
2043       if( (pIn1->flags & pIn3->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 ){
2044         if( pIn3->u.i > pIn1->u.i ){ res = +1; goto compare_op; }
2045         if( pIn3->u.i < pIn1->u.i ){ res = -1; goto compare_op; }
2046         res = 0;
2047         goto compare_op;
2048       }
2049     }else if( affinity==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ){
2050       if( (flags1 & MEM_Str)==0 && (flags1 & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real))!=0 ){
2051         testcase( pIn1->flags & MEM_Int );
2052         testcase( pIn1->flags & MEM_Real );
2053         sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(pIn1, encoding, 1);
2054         testcase( (flags1&MEM_Dyn) != (pIn1->flags&MEM_Dyn) );
2055         flags1 = (pIn1->flags & ~MEM_TypeMask) | (flags1 & MEM_TypeMask);
2056         assert( pIn1!=pIn3 );
2057       }
2058       if( (flags3 & MEM_Str)==0 && (flags3 & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real))!=0 ){
2059         testcase( pIn3->flags & MEM_Int );
2060         testcase( pIn3->flags & MEM_Real );
2061         sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(pIn3, encoding, 1);
2062         testcase( (flags3&MEM_Dyn) != (pIn3->flags&MEM_Dyn) );
2063         flags3 = (pIn3->flags & ~MEM_TypeMask) | (flags3 & MEM_TypeMask);
2064       }
2065     }
2066     assert( pOp->p4type==P4_COLLSEQ || pOp->p4.pColl==0 );
2067     res = sqlite3MemCompare(pIn3, pIn1, pOp->p4.pColl);
2068   }
2069 compare_op:
2070   switch( pOp->opcode ){
2071     case OP_Eq:    res2 = res==0;     break;
2072     case OP_Ne:    res2 = res;        break;
2073     case OP_Lt:    res2 = res<0;      break;
2074     case OP_Le:    res2 = res<=0;     break;
2075     case OP_Gt:    res2 = res>0;      break;
2076     default:       res2 = res>=0;     break;
2077   }
2078 
2079   /* Undo any changes made by applyAffinity() to the input registers. */
2080   assert( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Dyn) == (flags1 & MEM_Dyn) );
2081   pIn1->flags = flags1;
2082   assert( (pIn3->flags & MEM_Dyn) == (flags3 & MEM_Dyn) );
2083   pIn3->flags = flags3;
2084 
2085   if( pOp->p5 & SQLITE_STOREP2 ){
2086     pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2];
2087     iCompare = res;
2088     res2 = res2!=0;  /* For this path res2 must be exactly 0 or 1 */
2089     if( (pOp->p5 & SQLITE_KEEPNULL)!=0 ){
2090       /* The KEEPNULL flag prevents OP_Eq from overwriting a NULL with 1
2091       ** and prevents OP_Ne from overwriting NULL with 0.  This flag
2092       ** is only used in contexts where either:
2093       **   (1) op==OP_Eq && (r[P2]==NULL || r[P2]==0)
2094       **   (2) op==OP_Ne && (r[P2]==NULL || r[P2]==1)
2095       ** Therefore it is not necessary to check the content of r[P2] for
2096       ** NULL. */
2097       assert( pOp->opcode==OP_Ne || pOp->opcode==OP_Eq );
2098       assert( res2==0 || res2==1 );
2099       testcase( res2==0 && pOp->opcode==OP_Eq );
2100       testcase( res2==1 && pOp->opcode==OP_Eq );
2101       testcase( res2==0 && pOp->opcode==OP_Ne );
2102       testcase( res2==1 && pOp->opcode==OP_Ne );
2103       if( (pOp->opcode==OP_Eq)==res2 ) break;
2104     }
2105     memAboutToChange(p, pOut);
2106     MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int);
2107     pOut->u.i = res2;
2108     REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2, pOut);
2109   }else{
2110     VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0, (pOp->p5 & SQLITE_NULLEQ)?2:3);
2111     if( res2 ){
2112       goto jump_to_p2;
2113     }
2114   }
2115   break;
2116 }
2117 
2118 /* Opcode: ElseNotEq * P2 * * *
2119 **
2120 ** This opcode must immediately follow an OP_Lt or OP_Gt comparison operator.
2121 ** If result of an OP_Eq comparison on the same two operands
2122 ** would have be NULL or false (0), then then jump to P2.
2123 ** If the result of an OP_Eq comparison on the two previous operands
2124 ** would have been true (1), then fall through.
2125 */
2126 case OP_ElseNotEq: {       /* same as TK_ESCAPE, jump */
2127   assert( pOp>aOp );
2128   assert( pOp[-1].opcode==OP_Lt || pOp[-1].opcode==OP_Gt );
2129   assert( pOp[-1].p5 & SQLITE_STOREP2 );
2130   VdbeBranchTaken(iCompare!=0, 2);
2131   if( iCompare!=0 ) goto jump_to_p2;
2132   break;
2133 }
2134 
2135 
2136 /* Opcode: Permutation * * * P4 *
2137 **
2138 ** Set the permutation used by the OP_Compare operator in the next
2139 ** instruction.  The permutation is stored in the P4 operand.
2140 **
2141 ** The permutation is only valid until the next OP_Compare that has
2142 ** the OPFLAG_PERMUTE bit set in P5. Typically the OP_Permutation should
2143 ** occur immediately prior to the OP_Compare.
2144 **
2145 ** The first integer in the P4 integer array is the length of the array
2146 ** and does not become part of the permutation.
2147 */
2148 case OP_Permutation: {
2149   assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INTARRAY );
2150   assert( pOp->p4.ai );
2151   assert( pOp[1].opcode==OP_Compare );
2152   assert( pOp[1].p5 & OPFLAG_PERMUTE );
2153   break;
2154 }
2155 
2156 /* Opcode: Compare P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
2157 ** Synopsis: r[P1@P3] <-> r[P2@P3]
2158 **
2159 ** Compare two vectors of registers in reg(P1)..reg(P1+P3-1) (call this
2160 ** vector "A") and in reg(P2)..reg(P2+P3-1) ("B").  Save the result of
2161 ** the comparison for use by the next OP_Jump instruct.
2162 **
2163 ** If P5 has the OPFLAG_PERMUTE bit set, then the order of comparison is
2164 ** determined by the most recent OP_Permutation operator.  If the
2165 ** OPFLAG_PERMUTE bit is clear, then register are compared in sequential
2166 ** order.
2167 **
2168 ** P4 is a KeyInfo structure that defines collating sequences and sort
2169 ** orders for the comparison.  The permutation applies to registers
2170 ** only.  The KeyInfo elements are used sequentially.
2171 **
2172 ** The comparison is a sort comparison, so NULLs compare equal,
2173 ** NULLs are less than numbers, numbers are less than strings,
2174 ** and strings are less than blobs.
2175 */
2176 case OP_Compare: {
2177   int n;
2178   int i;
2179   int p1;
2180   int p2;
2181   const KeyInfo *pKeyInfo;
2182   int idx;
2183   CollSeq *pColl;    /* Collating sequence to use on this term */
2184   int bRev;          /* True for DESCENDING sort order */
2185   int *aPermute;     /* The permutation */
2186 
2187   if( (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_PERMUTE)==0 ){
2188     aPermute = 0;
2189   }else{
2190     assert( pOp>aOp );
2191     assert( pOp[-1].opcode==OP_Permutation );
2192     assert( pOp[-1].p4type==P4_INTARRAY );
2193     aPermute = pOp[-1].p4.ai + 1;
2194     assert( aPermute!=0 );
2195   }
2196   n = pOp->p3;
2197   pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo;
2198   assert( n>0 );
2199   assert( pKeyInfo!=0 );
2200   p1 = pOp->p1;
2201   p2 = pOp->p2;
2202 #if SQLITE_DEBUG
2203   if( aPermute ){
2204     int k, mx = 0;
2205     for(k=0; k<n; k++) if( aPermute[k]>mx ) mx = aPermute[k];
2206     assert( p1>0 && p1+mx<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 );
2207     assert( p2>0 && p2+mx<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 );
2208   }else{
2209     assert( p1>0 && p1+n<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 );
2210     assert( p2>0 && p2+n<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 );
2211   }
2212 #endif /* SQLITE_DEBUG */
2213   for(i=0; i<n; i++){
2214     idx = aPermute ? aPermute[i] : i;
2215     assert( memIsValid(&aMem[p1+idx]) );
2216     assert( memIsValid(&aMem[p2+idx]) );
2217     REGISTER_TRACE(p1+idx, &aMem[p1+idx]);
2218     REGISTER_TRACE(p2+idx, &aMem[p2+idx]);
2219     assert( i<pKeyInfo->nField );
2220     pColl = pKeyInfo->aColl[i];
2221     bRev = pKeyInfo->aSortOrder[i];
2222     iCompare = sqlite3MemCompare(&aMem[p1+idx], &aMem[p2+idx], pColl);
2223     if( iCompare ){
2224       if( bRev ) iCompare = -iCompare;
2225       break;
2226     }
2227   }
2228   break;
2229 }
2230 
2231 /* Opcode: Jump P1 P2 P3 * *
2232 **
2233 ** Jump to the instruction at address P1, P2, or P3 depending on whether
2234 ** in the most recent OP_Compare instruction the P1 vector was less than
2235 ** equal to, or greater than the P2 vector, respectively.
2236 */
2237 case OP_Jump: {             /* jump */
2238   if( iCompare<0 ){
2239     VdbeBranchTaken(0,3); pOp = &aOp[pOp->p1 - 1];
2240   }else if( iCompare==0 ){
2241     VdbeBranchTaken(1,3); pOp = &aOp[pOp->p2 - 1];
2242   }else{
2243     VdbeBranchTaken(2,3); pOp = &aOp[pOp->p3 - 1];
2244   }
2245   break;
2246 }
2247 
2248 /* Opcode: And P1 P2 P3 * *
2249 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=(r[P1] && r[P2])
2250 **
2251 ** Take the logical AND of the values in registers P1 and P2 and
2252 ** write the result into register P3.
2253 **
2254 ** If either P1 or P2 is 0 (false) then the result is 0 even if
2255 ** the other input is NULL.  A NULL and true or two NULLs give
2256 ** a NULL output.
2257 */
2258 /* Opcode: Or P1 P2 P3 * *
2259 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=(r[P1] || r[P2])
2260 **
2261 ** Take the logical OR of the values in register P1 and P2 and
2262 ** store the answer in register P3.
2263 **
2264 ** If either P1 or P2 is nonzero (true) then the result is 1 (true)
2265 ** even if the other input is NULL.  A NULL and false or two NULLs
2266 ** give a NULL output.
2267 */
2268 case OP_And:              /* same as TK_AND, in1, in2, out3 */
2269 case OP_Or: {             /* same as TK_OR, in1, in2, out3 */
2270   int v1;    /* Left operand:  0==FALSE, 1==TRUE, 2==UNKNOWN or NULL */
2271   int v2;    /* Right operand: 0==FALSE, 1==TRUE, 2==UNKNOWN or NULL */
2272 
2273   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
2274   if( pIn1->flags & MEM_Null ){
2275     v1 = 2;
2276   }else{
2277     v1 = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn1)!=0;
2278   }
2279   pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2];
2280   if( pIn2->flags & MEM_Null ){
2281     v2 = 2;
2282   }else{
2283     v2 = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn2)!=0;
2284   }
2285   if( pOp->opcode==OP_And ){
2286     static const unsigned char and_logic[] = { 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 2, 0, 2, 2 };
2287     v1 = and_logic[v1*3+v2];
2288   }else{
2289     static const unsigned char or_logic[] = { 0, 1, 2, 1, 1, 1, 2, 1, 2 };
2290     v1 = or_logic[v1*3+v2];
2291   }
2292   pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3];
2293   if( v1==2 ){
2294     MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Null);
2295   }else{
2296     pOut->u.i = v1;
2297     MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int);
2298   }
2299   break;
2300 }
2301 
2302 /* Opcode: Not P1 P2 * * *
2303 ** Synopsis: r[P2]= !r[P1]
2304 **
2305 ** Interpret the value in register P1 as a boolean value.  Store the
2306 ** boolean complement in register P2.  If the value in register P1 is
2307 ** NULL, then a NULL is stored in P2.
2308 */
2309 case OP_Not: {                /* same as TK_NOT, in1, out2 */
2310   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
2311   pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2];
2312   sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut);
2313   if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ){
2314     pOut->flags = MEM_Int;
2315     pOut->u.i = !sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn1);
2316   }
2317   break;
2318 }
2319 
2320 /* Opcode: BitNot P1 P2 * * *
2321 ** Synopsis: r[P1]= ~r[P1]
2322 **
2323 ** Interpret the content of register P1 as an integer.  Store the
2324 ** ones-complement of the P1 value into register P2.  If P1 holds
2325 ** a NULL then store a NULL in P2.
2326 */
2327 case OP_BitNot: {             /* same as TK_BITNOT, in1, out2 */
2328   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
2329   pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2];
2330   sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut);
2331   if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ){
2332     pOut->flags = MEM_Int;
2333     pOut->u.i = ~sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn1);
2334   }
2335   break;
2336 }
2337 
2338 /* Opcode: Once P1 P2 * * *
2339 **
2340 ** If the P1 value is equal to the P1 value on the OP_Init opcode at
2341 ** instruction 0, then jump to P2.  If the two P1 values differ, then
2342 ** set the P1 value on this opcode to equal the P1 value on the OP_Init
2343 ** and fall through.
2344 */
2345 case OP_Once: {             /* jump */
2346   assert( p->aOp[0].opcode==OP_Init );
2347   VdbeBranchTaken(p->aOp[0].p1==pOp->p1, 2);
2348   if( p->aOp[0].p1==pOp->p1 ){
2349     goto jump_to_p2;
2350   }else{
2351     pOp->p1 = p->aOp[0].p1;
2352   }
2353   break;
2354 }
2355 
2356 /* Opcode: If P1 P2 P3 * *
2357 **
2358 ** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is true.  The value
2359 ** is considered true if it is numeric and non-zero.  If the value
2360 ** in P1 is NULL then take the jump if and only if P3 is non-zero.
2361 */
2362 /* Opcode: IfNot P1 P2 P3 * *
2363 **
2364 ** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is False.  The value
2365 ** is considered false if it has a numeric value of zero.  If the value
2366 ** in P1 is NULL then take the jump if and only if P3 is non-zero.
2367 */
2368 case OP_If:                 /* jump, in1 */
2369 case OP_IfNot: {            /* jump, in1 */
2370   int c;
2371   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
2372   if( pIn1->flags & MEM_Null ){
2373     c = pOp->p3;
2374   }else{
2375 #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT
2376     c = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn1)!=0;
2377 #else
2378     c = sqlite3VdbeRealValue(pIn1)!=0.0;
2379 #endif
2380     if( pOp->opcode==OP_IfNot ) c = !c;
2381   }
2382   VdbeBranchTaken(c!=0, 2);
2383   if( c ){
2384     goto jump_to_p2;
2385   }
2386   break;
2387 }
2388 
2389 /* Opcode: IsNull P1 P2 * * *
2390 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]==NULL goto P2
2391 **
2392 ** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is NULL.
2393 */
2394 case OP_IsNull: {            /* same as TK_ISNULL, jump, in1 */
2395   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
2396   VdbeBranchTaken( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)!=0, 2);
2397   if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)!=0 ){
2398     goto jump_to_p2;
2399   }
2400   break;
2401 }
2402 
2403 /* Opcode: NotNull P1 P2 * * *
2404 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]!=NULL goto P2
2405 **
2406 ** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is not NULL.
2407 */
2408 case OP_NotNull: {            /* same as TK_NOTNULL, jump, in1 */
2409   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
2410   VdbeBranchTaken( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)==0, 2);
2411   if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ){
2412     goto jump_to_p2;
2413   }
2414   break;
2415 }
2416 
2417 /* Opcode: Column P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
2418 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=PX
2419 **
2420 ** Interpret the data that cursor P1 points to as a structure built using
2421 ** the MakeRecord instruction.  (See the MakeRecord opcode for additional
2422 ** information about the format of the data.)  Extract the P2-th column
2423 ** from this record.  If there are less that (P2+1)
2424 ** values in the record, extract a NULL.
2425 **
2426 ** The value extracted is stored in register P3.
2427 **
2428 ** If the column contains fewer than P2 fields, then extract a NULL.  Or,
2429 ** if the P4 argument is a P4_MEM use the value of the P4 argument as
2430 ** the result.
2431 **
2432 ** If the OPFLAG_CLEARCACHE bit is set on P5 and P1 is a pseudo-table cursor,
2433 ** then the cache of the cursor is reset prior to extracting the column.
2434 ** The first OP_Column against a pseudo-table after the value of the content
2435 ** register has changed should have this bit set.
2436 **
2437 ** If the OPFLAG_LENGTHARG and OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG bits are set on P5 when
2438 ** the result is guaranteed to only be used as the argument of a length()
2439 ** or typeof() function, respectively.  The loading of large blobs can be
2440 ** skipped for length() and all content loading can be skipped for typeof().
2441 */
2442 case OP_Column: {
2443   int p2;            /* column number to retrieve */
2444   VdbeCursor *pC;    /* The VDBE cursor */
2445   BtCursor *pCrsr;   /* The BTree cursor */
2446   u32 *aOffset;      /* aOffset[i] is offset to start of data for i-th column */
2447   int len;           /* The length of the serialized data for the column */
2448   int i;             /* Loop counter */
2449   Mem *pDest;        /* Where to write the extracted value */
2450   Mem sMem;          /* For storing the record being decoded */
2451   const u8 *zData;   /* Part of the record being decoded */
2452   const u8 *zHdr;    /* Next unparsed byte of the header */
2453   const u8 *zEndHdr; /* Pointer to first byte after the header */
2454   u32 offset;        /* Offset into the data */
2455   u64 offset64;      /* 64-bit offset */
2456   u32 avail;         /* Number of bytes of available data */
2457   u32 t;             /* A type code from the record header */
2458   Mem *pReg;         /* PseudoTable input register */
2459 
2460   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
2461   p2 = pOp->p2;
2462 
2463   /* If the cursor cache is stale, bring it up-to-date */
2464   rc = sqlite3VdbeCursorMoveto(&pC, &p2);
2465   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
2466 
2467   assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) );
2468   pDest = &aMem[pOp->p3];
2469   memAboutToChange(p, pDest);
2470   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
2471   assert( pC!=0 );
2472   assert( p2<pC->nField );
2473   aOffset = pC->aOffset;
2474   assert( pC->eCurType!=CURTYPE_VTAB );
2475   assert( pC->eCurType!=CURTYPE_PSEUDO || pC->nullRow );
2476   assert( pC->eCurType!=CURTYPE_SORTER );
2477 
2478   if( pC->cacheStatus!=p->cacheCtr ){                /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/
2479     if( pC->nullRow ){
2480       if( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_PSEUDO ){
2481         assert( pC->uc.pseudoTableReg>0 );
2482         pReg = &aMem[pC->uc.pseudoTableReg];
2483         assert( pReg->flags & MEM_Blob );
2484         assert( memIsValid(pReg) );
2485         pC->payloadSize = pC->szRow = avail = pReg->n;
2486         pC->aRow = (u8*)pReg->z;
2487       }else{
2488         sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pDest);
2489         goto op_column_out;
2490       }
2491     }else{
2492       pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor;
2493       assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
2494       assert( pCrsr );
2495       assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCrsr) );
2496       pC->payloadSize = sqlite3BtreePayloadSize(pCrsr);
2497       pC->aRow = sqlite3BtreePayloadFetch(pCrsr, &avail);
2498       assert( avail<=65536 );  /* Maximum page size is 64KiB */
2499       if( pC->payloadSize <= (u32)avail ){
2500         pC->szRow = pC->payloadSize;
2501       }else if( pC->payloadSize > (u32)db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ){
2502         goto too_big;
2503       }else{
2504         pC->szRow = avail;
2505       }
2506     }
2507     pC->cacheStatus = p->cacheCtr;
2508     pC->iHdrOffset = getVarint32(pC->aRow, offset);
2509     pC->nHdrParsed = 0;
2510     aOffset[0] = offset;
2511 
2512 
2513     if( avail<offset ){      /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/
2514       /* pC->aRow does not have to hold the entire row, but it does at least
2515       ** need to cover the header of the record.  If pC->aRow does not contain
2516       ** the complete header, then set it to zero, forcing the header to be
2517       ** dynamically allocated. */
2518       pC->aRow = 0;
2519       pC->szRow = 0;
2520 
2521       /* Make sure a corrupt database has not given us an oversize header.
2522       ** Do this now to avoid an oversize memory allocation.
2523       **
2524       ** Type entries can be between 1 and 5 bytes each.  But 4 and 5 byte
2525       ** types use so much data space that there can only be 4096 and 32 of
2526       ** them, respectively.  So the maximum header length results from a
2527       ** 3-byte type for each of the maximum of 32768 columns plus three
2528       ** extra bytes for the header length itself.  32768*3 + 3 = 98307.
2529       */
2530       if( offset > 98307 || offset > pC->payloadSize ){
2531         rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
2532         goto abort_due_to_error;
2533       }
2534     }else if( offset>0 ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-TRUE*/
2535       /* The following goto is an optimization.  It can be omitted and
2536       ** everything will still work.  But OP_Column is measurably faster
2537       ** by skipping the subsequent conditional, which is always true.
2538       */
2539       zData = pC->aRow;
2540       assert( pC->nHdrParsed<=p2 );         /* Conditional skipped */
2541       goto op_column_read_header;
2542     }
2543   }
2544 
2545   /* Make sure at least the first p2+1 entries of the header have been
2546   ** parsed and valid information is in aOffset[] and pC->aType[].
2547   */
2548   if( pC->nHdrParsed<=p2 ){
2549     /* If there is more header available for parsing in the record, try
2550     ** to extract additional fields up through the p2+1-th field
2551     */
2552     if( pC->iHdrOffset<aOffset[0] ){
2553       /* Make sure zData points to enough of the record to cover the header. */
2554       if( pC->aRow==0 ){
2555         memset(&sMem, 0, sizeof(sMem));
2556         rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtree(pC->uc.pCursor, 0, aOffset[0], &sMem);
2557         if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error;
2558         zData = (u8*)sMem.z;
2559       }else{
2560         zData = pC->aRow;
2561       }
2562 
2563       /* Fill in pC->aType[i] and aOffset[i] values through the p2-th field. */
2564     op_column_read_header:
2565       i = pC->nHdrParsed;
2566       offset64 = aOffset[i];
2567       zHdr = zData + pC->iHdrOffset;
2568       zEndHdr = zData + aOffset[0];
2569       do{
2570         if( (t = zHdr[0])<0x80 ){
2571           zHdr++;
2572           offset64 += sqlite3VdbeOneByteSerialTypeLen(t);
2573         }else{
2574           zHdr += sqlite3GetVarint32(zHdr, &t);
2575           offset64 += sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(t);
2576         }
2577         pC->aType[i++] = t;
2578         aOffset[i] = (u32)(offset64 & 0xffffffff);
2579       }while( i<=p2 && zHdr<zEndHdr );
2580 
2581       /* The record is corrupt if any of the following are true:
2582       ** (1) the bytes of the header extend past the declared header size
2583       ** (2) the entire header was used but not all data was used
2584       ** (3) the end of the data extends beyond the end of the record.
2585       */
2586       if( (zHdr>=zEndHdr && (zHdr>zEndHdr || offset64!=pC->payloadSize))
2587        || (offset64 > pC->payloadSize)
2588       ){
2589         if( pC->aRow==0 ) sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(&sMem);
2590         rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
2591         goto abort_due_to_error;
2592       }
2593 
2594       pC->nHdrParsed = i;
2595       pC->iHdrOffset = (u32)(zHdr - zData);
2596       if( pC->aRow==0 ) sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(&sMem);
2597     }else{
2598       t = 0;
2599     }
2600 
2601     /* If after trying to extract new entries from the header, nHdrParsed is
2602     ** still not up to p2, that means that the record has fewer than p2
2603     ** columns.  So the result will be either the default value or a NULL.
2604     */
2605     if( pC->nHdrParsed<=p2 ){
2606       if( pOp->p4type==P4_MEM ){
2607         sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pDest, pOp->p4.pMem, MEM_Static);
2608       }else{
2609         sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pDest);
2610       }
2611       goto op_column_out;
2612     }
2613   }else{
2614     t = pC->aType[p2];
2615   }
2616 
2617   /* Extract the content for the p2+1-th column.  Control can only
2618   ** reach this point if aOffset[p2], aOffset[p2+1], and pC->aType[p2] are
2619   ** all valid.
2620   */
2621   assert( p2<pC->nHdrParsed );
2622   assert( rc==SQLITE_OK );
2623   assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(pDest) );
2624   if( VdbeMemDynamic(pDest) ){
2625     sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pDest);
2626   }
2627   assert( t==pC->aType[p2] );
2628   if( pC->szRow>=aOffset[p2+1] ){
2629     /* This is the common case where the desired content fits on the original
2630     ** page - where the content is not on an overflow page */
2631     zData = pC->aRow + aOffset[p2];
2632     if( t<12 ){
2633       sqlite3VdbeSerialGet(zData, t, pDest);
2634     }else{
2635       /* If the column value is a string, we need a persistent value, not
2636       ** a MEM_Ephem value.  This branch is a fast short-cut that is equivalent
2637       ** to calling sqlite3VdbeSerialGet() and sqlite3VdbeDeephemeralize().
2638       */
2639       static const u16 aFlag[] = { MEM_Blob, MEM_Str|MEM_Term };
2640       pDest->n = len = (t-12)/2;
2641       pDest->enc = encoding;
2642       if( pDest->szMalloc < len+2 ){
2643         pDest->flags = MEM_Null;
2644         if( sqlite3VdbeMemGrow(pDest, len+2, 0) ) goto no_mem;
2645       }else{
2646         pDest->z = pDest->zMalloc;
2647       }
2648       memcpy(pDest->z, zData, len);
2649       pDest->z[len] = 0;
2650       pDest->z[len+1] = 0;
2651       pDest->flags = aFlag[t&1];
2652     }
2653   }else{
2654     pDest->enc = encoding;
2655     /* This branch happens only when content is on overflow pages */
2656     if( ((pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_LENGTHARG|OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG))!=0
2657           && ((t>=12 && (t&1)==0) || (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG)!=0))
2658      || (len = sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(t))==0
2659     ){
2660       /* Content is irrelevant for
2661       **    1. the typeof() function,
2662       **    2. the length(X) function if X is a blob, and
2663       **    3. if the content length is zero.
2664       ** So we might as well use bogus content rather than reading
2665       ** content from disk. */
2666       static u8 aZero[8];  /* This is the bogus content */
2667       sqlite3VdbeSerialGet(aZero, t, pDest);
2668     }else{
2669       rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtree(pC->uc.pCursor, aOffset[p2], len, pDest);
2670       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error;
2671       sqlite3VdbeSerialGet((const u8*)pDest->z, t, pDest);
2672       pDest->flags &= ~MEM_Ephem;
2673     }
2674   }
2675 
2676 op_column_out:
2677   UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pDest);
2678   REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pDest);
2679   break;
2680 }
2681 
2682 /* Opcode: Affinity P1 P2 * P4 *
2683 ** Synopsis: affinity(r[P1@P2])
2684 **
2685 ** Apply affinities to a range of P2 registers starting with P1.
2686 **
2687 ** P4 is a string that is P2 characters long. The nth character of the
2688 ** string indicates the column affinity that should be used for the nth
2689 ** memory cell in the range.
2690 */
2691 case OP_Affinity: {
2692   const char *zAffinity;   /* The affinity to be applied */
2693   char cAff;               /* A single character of affinity */
2694 
2695   zAffinity = pOp->p4.z;
2696   assert( zAffinity!=0 );
2697   assert( zAffinity[pOp->p2]==0 );
2698   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
2699   while( (cAff = *(zAffinity++))!=0 ){
2700     assert( pIn1 <= &p->aMem[(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)] );
2701     assert( memIsValid(pIn1) );
2702     applyAffinity(pIn1, cAff, encoding);
2703     pIn1++;
2704   }
2705   break;
2706 }
2707 
2708 /* Opcode: MakeRecord P1 P2 P3 P4 *
2709 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=mkrec(r[P1@P2])
2710 **
2711 ** Convert P2 registers beginning with P1 into the [record format]
2712 ** use as a data record in a database table or as a key
2713 ** in an index.  The OP_Column opcode can decode the record later.
2714 **
2715 ** P4 may be a string that is P2 characters long.  The nth character of the
2716 ** string indicates the column affinity that should be used for the nth
2717 ** field of the index key.
2718 **
2719 ** The mapping from character to affinity is given by the SQLITE_AFF_
2720 ** macros defined in sqliteInt.h.
2721 **
2722 ** If P4 is NULL then all index fields have the affinity BLOB.
2723 */
2724 case OP_MakeRecord: {
2725   u8 *zNewRecord;        /* A buffer to hold the data for the new record */
2726   Mem *pRec;             /* The new record */
2727   u64 nData;             /* Number of bytes of data space */
2728   int nHdr;              /* Number of bytes of header space */
2729   i64 nByte;             /* Data space required for this record */
2730   i64 nZero;             /* Number of zero bytes at the end of the record */
2731   int nVarint;           /* Number of bytes in a varint */
2732   u32 serial_type;       /* Type field */
2733   Mem *pData0;           /* First field to be combined into the record */
2734   Mem *pLast;            /* Last field of the record */
2735   int nField;            /* Number of fields in the record */
2736   char *zAffinity;       /* The affinity string for the record */
2737   int file_format;       /* File format to use for encoding */
2738   int i;                 /* Space used in zNewRecord[] header */
2739   int j;                 /* Space used in zNewRecord[] content */
2740   u32 len;               /* Length of a field */
2741 
2742   /* Assuming the record contains N fields, the record format looks
2743   ** like this:
2744   **
2745   ** ------------------------------------------------------------------------
2746   ** | hdr-size | type 0 | type 1 | ... | type N-1 | data0 | ... | data N-1 |
2747   ** ------------------------------------------------------------------------
2748   **
2749   ** Data(0) is taken from register P1.  Data(1) comes from register P1+1
2750   ** and so forth.
2751   **
2752   ** Each type field is a varint representing the serial type of the
2753   ** corresponding data element (see sqlite3VdbeSerialType()). The
2754   ** hdr-size field is also a varint which is the offset from the beginning
2755   ** of the record to data0.
2756   */
2757   nData = 0;         /* Number of bytes of data space */
2758   nHdr = 0;          /* Number of bytes of header space */
2759   nZero = 0;         /* Number of zero bytes at the end of the record */
2760   nField = pOp->p1;
2761   zAffinity = pOp->p4.z;
2762   assert( nField>0 && pOp->p2>0 && pOp->p2+nField<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 );
2763   pData0 = &aMem[nField];
2764   nField = pOp->p2;
2765   pLast = &pData0[nField-1];
2766   file_format = p->minWriteFileFormat;
2767 
2768   /* Identify the output register */
2769   assert( pOp->p3<pOp->p1 || pOp->p3>=pOp->p1+pOp->p2 );
2770   pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3];
2771   memAboutToChange(p, pOut);
2772 
2773   /* Apply the requested affinity to all inputs
2774   */
2775   assert( pData0<=pLast );
2776   if( zAffinity ){
2777     pRec = pData0;
2778     do{
2779       applyAffinity(pRec++, *(zAffinity++), encoding);
2780       assert( zAffinity[0]==0 || pRec<=pLast );
2781     }while( zAffinity[0] );
2782   }
2783 
2784 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_NULL_TRIM
2785   /* NULLs can be safely trimmed from the end of the record, as long as
2786   ** as the schema format is 2 or more and none of the omitted columns
2787   ** have a non-NULL default value.  Also, the record must be left with
2788   ** at least one field.  If P5>0 then it will be one more than the
2789   ** index of the right-most column with a non-NULL default value */
2790   if( pOp->p5 ){
2791     while( (pLast->flags & MEM_Null)!=0 && nField>pOp->p5 ){
2792       pLast--;
2793       nField--;
2794     }
2795   }
2796 #endif
2797 
2798   /* Loop through the elements that will make up the record to figure
2799   ** out how much space is required for the new record.
2800   */
2801   pRec = pLast;
2802   do{
2803     assert( memIsValid(pRec) );
2804     pRec->uTemp = serial_type = sqlite3VdbeSerialType(pRec, file_format, &len);
2805     if( pRec->flags & MEM_Zero ){
2806       if( nData ){
2807         if( sqlite3VdbeMemExpandBlob(pRec) ) goto no_mem;
2808       }else{
2809         nZero += pRec->u.nZero;
2810         len -= pRec->u.nZero;
2811       }
2812     }
2813     nData += len;
2814     testcase( serial_type==127 );
2815     testcase( serial_type==128 );
2816     nHdr += serial_type<=127 ? 1 : sqlite3VarintLen(serial_type);
2817     if( pRec==pData0 ) break;
2818     pRec--;
2819   }while(1);
2820 
2821   /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-22564-11647 The header begins with a single varint
2822   ** which determines the total number of bytes in the header. The varint
2823   ** value is the size of the header in bytes including the size varint
2824   ** itself. */
2825   testcase( nHdr==126 );
2826   testcase( nHdr==127 );
2827   if( nHdr<=126 ){
2828     /* The common case */
2829     nHdr += 1;
2830   }else{
2831     /* Rare case of a really large header */
2832     nVarint = sqlite3VarintLen(nHdr);
2833     nHdr += nVarint;
2834     if( nVarint<sqlite3VarintLen(nHdr) ) nHdr++;
2835   }
2836   nByte = nHdr+nData;
2837   if( nByte+nZero>db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ){
2838     goto too_big;
2839   }
2840 
2841   /* Make sure the output register has a buffer large enough to store
2842   ** the new record. The output register (pOp->p3) is not allowed to
2843   ** be one of the input registers (because the following call to
2844   ** sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize() could clobber the value before it is used).
2845   */
2846   if( sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize(pOut, (int)nByte) ){
2847     goto no_mem;
2848   }
2849   zNewRecord = (u8 *)pOut->z;
2850 
2851   /* Write the record */
2852   i = putVarint32(zNewRecord, nHdr);
2853   j = nHdr;
2854   assert( pData0<=pLast );
2855   pRec = pData0;
2856   do{
2857     serial_type = pRec->uTemp;
2858     /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-06529-47362 Following the size varint are one or more
2859     ** additional varints, one per column. */
2860     i += putVarint32(&zNewRecord[i], serial_type);            /* serial type */
2861     /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-64536-51728 The values for each column in the record
2862     ** immediately follow the header. */
2863     j += sqlite3VdbeSerialPut(&zNewRecord[j], pRec, serial_type); /* content */
2864   }while( (++pRec)<=pLast );
2865   assert( i==nHdr );
2866   assert( j==nByte );
2867 
2868   assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) );
2869   pOut->n = (int)nByte;
2870   pOut->flags = MEM_Blob;
2871   if( nZero ){
2872     pOut->u.nZero = nZero;
2873     pOut->flags |= MEM_Zero;
2874   }
2875   pOut->enc = SQLITE_UTF8;  /* In case the blob is ever converted to text */
2876   REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pOut);
2877   UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut);
2878   break;
2879 }
2880 
2881 /* Opcode: Count P1 P2 * * *
2882 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=count()
2883 **
2884 ** Store the number of entries (an integer value) in the table or index
2885 ** opened by cursor P1 in register P2
2886 */
2887 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_BTREECOUNT
2888 case OP_Count: {         /* out2 */
2889   i64 nEntry;
2890   BtCursor *pCrsr;
2891 
2892   assert( p->apCsr[pOp->p1]->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
2893   pCrsr = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]->uc.pCursor;
2894   assert( pCrsr );
2895   nEntry = 0;  /* Not needed.  Only used to silence a warning. */
2896   rc = sqlite3BtreeCount(pCrsr, &nEntry);
2897   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
2898   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
2899   pOut->u.i = nEntry;
2900   break;
2901 }
2902 #endif
2903 
2904 /* Opcode: Savepoint P1 * * P4 *
2905 **
2906 ** Open, release or rollback the savepoint named by parameter P4, depending
2907 ** on the value of P1. To open a new savepoint, P1==0. To release (commit) an
2908 ** existing savepoint, P1==1, or to rollback an existing savepoint P1==2.
2909 */
2910 case OP_Savepoint: {
2911   int p1;                         /* Value of P1 operand */
2912   char *zName;                    /* Name of savepoint */
2913   int nName;
2914   Savepoint *pNew;
2915   Savepoint *pSavepoint;
2916   Savepoint *pTmp;
2917   int iSavepoint;
2918   int ii;
2919 
2920   p1 = pOp->p1;
2921   zName = pOp->p4.z;
2922 
2923   /* Assert that the p1 parameter is valid. Also that if there is no open
2924   ** transaction, then there cannot be any savepoints.
2925   */
2926   assert( db->pSavepoint==0 || db->autoCommit==0 );
2927   assert( p1==SAVEPOINT_BEGIN||p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE||p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK );
2928   assert( db->pSavepoint || db->isTransactionSavepoint==0 );
2929   assert( checkSavepointCount(db) );
2930   assert( p->bIsReader );
2931 
2932   if( p1==SAVEPOINT_BEGIN ){
2933     if( db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){
2934       /* A new savepoint cannot be created if there are active write
2935       ** statements (i.e. open read/write incremental blob handles).
2936       */
2937       sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot open savepoint - SQL statements in progress");
2938       rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
2939     }else{
2940       nName = sqlite3Strlen30(zName);
2941 
2942 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
2943       /* This call is Ok even if this savepoint is actually a transaction
2944       ** savepoint (and therefore should not prompt xSavepoint()) callbacks.
2945       ** If this is a transaction savepoint being opened, it is guaranteed
2946       ** that the db->aVTrans[] array is empty.  */
2947       assert( db->autoCommit==0 || db->nVTrans==0 );
2948       rc = sqlite3VtabSavepoint(db, SAVEPOINT_BEGIN,
2949                                 db->nStatement+db->nSavepoint);
2950       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error;
2951 #endif
2952 
2953       /* Create a new savepoint structure. */
2954       pNew = sqlite3DbMallocRawNN(db, sizeof(Savepoint)+nName+1);
2955       if( pNew ){
2956         pNew->zName = (char *)&pNew[1];
2957         memcpy(pNew->zName, zName, nName+1);
2958 
2959         /* If there is no open transaction, then mark this as a special
2960         ** "transaction savepoint". */
2961         if( db->autoCommit ){
2962           db->autoCommit = 0;
2963           db->isTransactionSavepoint = 1;
2964         }else{
2965           db->nSavepoint++;
2966         }
2967 
2968         /* Link the new savepoint into the database handle's list. */
2969         pNew->pNext = db->pSavepoint;
2970         db->pSavepoint = pNew;
2971         pNew->nDeferredCons = db->nDeferredCons;
2972         pNew->nDeferredImmCons = db->nDeferredImmCons;
2973       }
2974     }
2975   }else{
2976     iSavepoint = 0;
2977 
2978     /* Find the named savepoint. If there is no such savepoint, then an
2979     ** an error is returned to the user.  */
2980     for(
2981       pSavepoint = db->pSavepoint;
2982       pSavepoint && sqlite3StrICmp(pSavepoint->zName, zName);
2983       pSavepoint = pSavepoint->pNext
2984     ){
2985       iSavepoint++;
2986     }
2987     if( !pSavepoint ){
2988       sqlite3VdbeError(p, "no such savepoint: %s", zName);
2989       rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
2990     }else if( db->nVdbeWrite>0 && p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){
2991       /* It is not possible to release (commit) a savepoint if there are
2992       ** active write statements.
2993       */
2994       sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot release savepoint - "
2995                           "SQL statements in progress");
2996       rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
2997     }else{
2998 
2999       /* Determine whether or not this is a transaction savepoint. If so,
3000       ** and this is a RELEASE command, then the current transaction
3001       ** is committed.
3002       */
3003       int isTransaction = pSavepoint->pNext==0 && db->isTransactionSavepoint;
3004       if( isTransaction && p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){
3005         if( (rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 1))!=SQLITE_OK ){
3006           goto vdbe_return;
3007         }
3008         db->autoCommit = 1;
3009         if( sqlite3VdbeHalt(p)==SQLITE_BUSY ){
3010           p->pc = (int)(pOp - aOp);
3011           db->autoCommit = 0;
3012           p->rc = rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
3013           goto vdbe_return;
3014         }
3015         db->isTransactionSavepoint = 0;
3016         rc = p->rc;
3017       }else{
3018         int isSchemaChange;
3019         iSavepoint = db->nSavepoint - iSavepoint - 1;
3020         if( p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){
3021           isSchemaChange = (db->flags & SQLITE_InternChanges)!=0;
3022           for(ii=0; ii<db->nDb; ii++){
3023             rc = sqlite3BtreeTripAllCursors(db->aDb[ii].pBt,
3024                                        SQLITE_ABORT_ROLLBACK,
3025                                        isSchemaChange==0);
3026             if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error;
3027           }
3028         }else{
3029           isSchemaChange = 0;
3030         }
3031         for(ii=0; ii<db->nDb; ii++){
3032           rc = sqlite3BtreeSavepoint(db->aDb[ii].pBt, p1, iSavepoint);
3033           if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
3034             goto abort_due_to_error;
3035           }
3036         }
3037         if( isSchemaChange ){
3038           sqlite3ExpirePreparedStatements(db);
3039           sqlite3ResetAllSchemasOfConnection(db);
3040           db->flags = (db->flags | SQLITE_InternChanges);
3041         }
3042       }
3043 
3044       /* Regardless of whether this is a RELEASE or ROLLBACK, destroy all
3045       ** savepoints nested inside of the savepoint being operated on. */
3046       while( db->pSavepoint!=pSavepoint ){
3047         pTmp = db->pSavepoint;
3048         db->pSavepoint = pTmp->pNext;
3049         sqlite3DbFree(db, pTmp);
3050         db->nSavepoint--;
3051       }
3052 
3053       /* If it is a RELEASE, then destroy the savepoint being operated on
3054       ** too. If it is a ROLLBACK TO, then set the number of deferred
3055       ** constraint violations present in the database to the value stored
3056       ** when the savepoint was created.  */
3057       if( p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){
3058         assert( pSavepoint==db->pSavepoint );
3059         db->pSavepoint = pSavepoint->pNext;
3060         sqlite3DbFree(db, pSavepoint);
3061         if( !isTransaction ){
3062           db->nSavepoint--;
3063         }
3064       }else{
3065         db->nDeferredCons = pSavepoint->nDeferredCons;
3066         db->nDeferredImmCons = pSavepoint->nDeferredImmCons;
3067       }
3068 
3069       if( !isTransaction || p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){
3070         rc = sqlite3VtabSavepoint(db, p1, iSavepoint);
3071         if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error;
3072       }
3073     }
3074   }
3075   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
3076 
3077   break;
3078 }
3079 
3080 /* Opcode: AutoCommit P1 P2 * * *
3081 **
3082 ** Set the database auto-commit flag to P1 (1 or 0). If P2 is true, roll
3083 ** back any currently active btree transactions. If there are any active
3084 ** VMs (apart from this one), then a ROLLBACK fails.  A COMMIT fails if
3085 ** there are active writing VMs or active VMs that use shared cache.
3086 **
3087 ** This instruction causes the VM to halt.
3088 */
3089 case OP_AutoCommit: {
3090   int desiredAutoCommit;
3091   int iRollback;
3092 
3093   desiredAutoCommit = pOp->p1;
3094   iRollback = pOp->p2;
3095   assert( desiredAutoCommit==1 || desiredAutoCommit==0 );
3096   assert( desiredAutoCommit==1 || iRollback==0 );
3097   assert( db->nVdbeActive>0 );  /* At least this one VM is active */
3098   assert( p->bIsReader );
3099 
3100   if( desiredAutoCommit!=db->autoCommit ){
3101     if( iRollback ){
3102       assert( desiredAutoCommit==1 );
3103       sqlite3RollbackAll(db, SQLITE_ABORT_ROLLBACK);
3104       db->autoCommit = 1;
3105     }else if( desiredAutoCommit && db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){
3106       /* If this instruction implements a COMMIT and other VMs are writing
3107       ** return an error indicating that the other VMs must complete first.
3108       */
3109       sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot commit transaction - "
3110                           "SQL statements in progress");
3111       rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
3112       goto abort_due_to_error;
3113     }else if( (rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 1))!=SQLITE_OK ){
3114       goto vdbe_return;
3115     }else{
3116       db->autoCommit = (u8)desiredAutoCommit;
3117     }
3118     if( sqlite3VdbeHalt(p)==SQLITE_BUSY ){
3119       p->pc = (int)(pOp - aOp);
3120       db->autoCommit = (u8)(1-desiredAutoCommit);
3121       p->rc = rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
3122       goto vdbe_return;
3123     }
3124     assert( db->nStatement==0 );
3125     sqlite3CloseSavepoints(db);
3126     if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
3127       rc = SQLITE_DONE;
3128     }else{
3129       rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
3130     }
3131     goto vdbe_return;
3132   }else{
3133     sqlite3VdbeError(p,
3134         (!desiredAutoCommit)?"cannot start a transaction within a transaction":(
3135         (iRollback)?"cannot rollback - no transaction is active":
3136                    "cannot commit - no transaction is active"));
3137 
3138     rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
3139     goto abort_due_to_error;
3140   }
3141   break;
3142 }
3143 
3144 /* Opcode: Transaction P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
3145 **
3146 ** Begin a transaction on database P1 if a transaction is not already
3147 ** active.
3148 ** If P2 is non-zero, then a write-transaction is started, or if a
3149 ** read-transaction is already active, it is upgraded to a write-transaction.
3150 ** If P2 is zero, then a read-transaction is started.
3151 **
3152 ** P1 is the index of the database file on which the transaction is
3153 ** started.  Index 0 is the main database file and index 1 is the
3154 ** file used for temporary tables.  Indices of 2 or more are used for
3155 ** attached databases.
3156 **
3157 ** If a write-transaction is started and the Vdbe.usesStmtJournal flag is
3158 ** true (this flag is set if the Vdbe may modify more than one row and may
3159 ** throw an ABORT exception), a statement transaction may also be opened.
3160 ** More specifically, a statement transaction is opened iff the database
3161 ** connection is currently not in autocommit mode, or if there are other
3162 ** active statements. A statement transaction allows the changes made by this
3163 ** VDBE to be rolled back after an error without having to roll back the
3164 ** entire transaction. If no error is encountered, the statement transaction
3165 ** will automatically commit when the VDBE halts.
3166 **
3167 ** If P5!=0 then this opcode also checks the schema cookie against P3
3168 ** and the schema generation counter against P4.
3169 ** The cookie changes its value whenever the database schema changes.
3170 ** This operation is used to detect when that the cookie has changed
3171 ** and that the current process needs to reread the schema.  If the schema
3172 ** cookie in P3 differs from the schema cookie in the database header or
3173 ** if the schema generation counter in P4 differs from the current
3174 ** generation counter, then an SQLITE_SCHEMA error is raised and execution
3175 ** halts.  The sqlite3_step() wrapper function might then reprepare the
3176 ** statement and rerun it from the beginning.
3177 */
3178 case OP_Transaction: {
3179   Btree *pBt;
3180   int iMeta;
3181   int iGen;
3182 
3183   assert( p->bIsReader );
3184   assert( p->readOnly==0 || pOp->p2==0 );
3185   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb );
3186   assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p1) );
3187   if( pOp->p2 && (db->flags & SQLITE_QueryOnly)!=0 ){
3188     rc = SQLITE_READONLY;
3189     goto abort_due_to_error;
3190   }
3191   pBt = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt;
3192 
3193   if( pBt ){
3194     rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(pBt, pOp->p2);
3195     testcase( rc==SQLITE_BUSY_SNAPSHOT );
3196     testcase( rc==SQLITE_BUSY_RECOVERY );
3197     if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
3198       if( (rc&0xff)==SQLITE_BUSY ){
3199         p->pc = (int)(pOp - aOp);
3200         p->rc = rc;
3201         goto vdbe_return;
3202       }
3203       goto abort_due_to_error;
3204     }
3205 
3206     if( pOp->p2 && p->usesStmtJournal
3207      && (db->autoCommit==0 || db->nVdbeRead>1)
3208     ){
3209       assert( sqlite3BtreeIsInTrans(pBt) );
3210       if( p->iStatement==0 ){
3211         assert( db->nStatement>=0 && db->nSavepoint>=0 );
3212         db->nStatement++;
3213         p->iStatement = db->nSavepoint + db->nStatement;
3214       }
3215 
3216       rc = sqlite3VtabSavepoint(db, SAVEPOINT_BEGIN, p->iStatement-1);
3217       if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
3218         rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginStmt(pBt, p->iStatement);
3219       }
3220 
3221       /* Store the current value of the database handles deferred constraint
3222       ** counter. If the statement transaction needs to be rolled back,
3223       ** the value of this counter needs to be restored too.  */
3224       p->nStmtDefCons = db->nDeferredCons;
3225       p->nStmtDefImmCons = db->nDeferredImmCons;
3226     }
3227 
3228     /* Gather the schema version number for checking:
3229     ** IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-03189-51135 As each SQL statement runs, the schema
3230     ** version is checked to ensure that the schema has not changed since the
3231     ** SQL statement was prepared.
3232     */
3233     sqlite3BtreeGetMeta(pBt, BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION, (u32 *)&iMeta);
3234     iGen = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pSchema->iGeneration;
3235   }else{
3236     iGen = iMeta = 0;
3237   }
3238   assert( pOp->p5==0 || pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 );
3239   if( pOp->p5 && (iMeta!=pOp->p3 || iGen!=pOp->p4.i) ){
3240     sqlite3DbFree(db, p->zErrMsg);
3241     p->zErrMsg = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, "database schema has changed");
3242     /* If the schema-cookie from the database file matches the cookie
3243     ** stored with the in-memory representation of the schema, do
3244     ** not reload the schema from the database file.
3245     **
3246     ** If virtual-tables are in use, this is not just an optimization.
3247     ** Often, v-tables store their data in other SQLite tables, which
3248     ** are queried from within xNext() and other v-table methods using
3249     ** prepared queries. If such a query is out-of-date, we do not want to
3250     ** discard the database schema, as the user code implementing the
3251     ** v-table would have to be ready for the sqlite3_vtab structure itself
3252     ** to be invalidated whenever sqlite3_step() is called from within
3253     ** a v-table method.
3254     */
3255     if( db->aDb[pOp->p1].pSchema->schema_cookie!=iMeta ){
3256       sqlite3ResetOneSchema(db, pOp->p1);
3257     }
3258     p->expired = 1;
3259     rc = SQLITE_SCHEMA;
3260   }
3261   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
3262   break;
3263 }
3264 
3265 /* Opcode: ReadCookie P1 P2 P3 * *
3266 **
3267 ** Read cookie number P3 from database P1 and write it into register P2.
3268 ** P3==1 is the schema version.  P3==2 is the database format.
3269 ** P3==3 is the recommended pager cache size, and so forth.  P1==0 is
3270 ** the main database file and P1==1 is the database file used to store
3271 ** temporary tables.
3272 **
3273 ** There must be a read-lock on the database (either a transaction
3274 ** must be started or there must be an open cursor) before
3275 ** executing this instruction.
3276 */
3277 case OP_ReadCookie: {               /* out2 */
3278   int iMeta;
3279   int iDb;
3280   int iCookie;
3281 
3282   assert( p->bIsReader );
3283   iDb = pOp->p1;
3284   iCookie = pOp->p3;
3285   assert( pOp->p3<SQLITE_N_BTREE_META );
3286   assert( iDb>=0 && iDb<db->nDb );
3287   assert( db->aDb[iDb].pBt!=0 );
3288   assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, iDb) );
3289 
3290   sqlite3BtreeGetMeta(db->aDb[iDb].pBt, iCookie, (u32 *)&iMeta);
3291   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
3292   pOut->u.i = iMeta;
3293   break;
3294 }
3295 
3296 /* Opcode: SetCookie P1 P2 P3 * *
3297 **
3298 ** Write the integer value P3 into cookie number P2 of database P1.
3299 ** P2==1 is the schema version.  P2==2 is the database format.
3300 ** P2==3 is the recommended pager cache
3301 ** size, and so forth.  P1==0 is the main database file and P1==1 is the
3302 ** database file used to store temporary tables.
3303 **
3304 ** A transaction must be started before executing this opcode.
3305 */
3306 case OP_SetCookie: {
3307   Db *pDb;
3308   assert( pOp->p2<SQLITE_N_BTREE_META );
3309   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb );
3310   assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p1) );
3311   assert( p->readOnly==0 );
3312   pDb = &db->aDb[pOp->p1];
3313   assert( pDb->pBt!=0 );
3314   assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, pOp->p1, 0) );
3315   /* See note about index shifting on OP_ReadCookie */
3316   rc = sqlite3BtreeUpdateMeta(pDb->pBt, pOp->p2, pOp->p3);
3317   if( pOp->p2==BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION ){
3318     /* When the schema cookie changes, record the new cookie internally */
3319     pDb->pSchema->schema_cookie = pOp->p3;
3320     db->flags |= SQLITE_InternChanges;
3321   }else if( pOp->p2==BTREE_FILE_FORMAT ){
3322     /* Record changes in the file format */
3323     pDb->pSchema->file_format = pOp->p3;
3324   }
3325   if( pOp->p1==1 ){
3326     /* Invalidate all prepared statements whenever the TEMP database
3327     ** schema is changed.  Ticket #1644 */
3328     sqlite3ExpirePreparedStatements(db);
3329     p->expired = 0;
3330   }
3331   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
3332   break;
3333 }
3334 
3335 /* Opcode: OpenRead P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
3336 ** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3
3337 **
3338 ** Open a read-only cursor for the database table whose root page is
3339 ** P2 in a database file.  The database file is determined by P3.
3340 ** P3==0 means the main database, P3==1 means the database used for
3341 ** temporary tables, and P3>1 means used the corresponding attached
3342 ** database.  Give the new cursor an identifier of P1.  The P1
3343 ** values need not be contiguous but all P1 values should be small integers.
3344 ** It is an error for P1 to be negative.
3345 **
3346 ** If P5!=0 then use the content of register P2 as the root page, not
3347 ** the value of P2 itself.
3348 **
3349 ** There will be a read lock on the database whenever there is an
3350 ** open cursor.  If the database was unlocked prior to this instruction
3351 ** then a read lock is acquired as part of this instruction.  A read
3352 ** lock allows other processes to read the database but prohibits
3353 ** any other process from modifying the database.  The read lock is
3354 ** released when all cursors are closed.  If this instruction attempts
3355 ** to get a read lock but fails, the script terminates with an
3356 ** SQLITE_BUSY error code.
3357 **
3358 ** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to
3359 ** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo
3360 ** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating
3361 ** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer
3362 ** value, it is set to the number of columns in the table.
3363 **
3364 ** See also: OpenWrite, ReopenIdx
3365 */
3366 /* Opcode: ReopenIdx P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
3367 ** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3
3368 **
3369 ** The ReopenIdx opcode works exactly like ReadOpen except that it first
3370 ** checks to see if the cursor on P1 is already open with a root page
3371 ** number of P2 and if it is this opcode becomes a no-op.  In other words,
3372 ** if the cursor is already open, do not reopen it.
3373 **
3374 ** The ReopenIdx opcode may only be used with P5==0 and with P4 being
3375 ** a P4_KEYINFO object.  Furthermore, the P3 value must be the same as
3376 ** every other ReopenIdx or OpenRead for the same cursor number.
3377 **
3378 ** See the OpenRead opcode documentation for additional information.
3379 */
3380 /* Opcode: OpenWrite P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
3381 ** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3
3382 **
3383 ** Open a read/write cursor named P1 on the table or index whose root
3384 ** page is P2.  Or if P5!=0 use the content of register P2 to find the
3385 ** root page.
3386 **
3387 ** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to
3388 ** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo
3389 ** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating
3390 ** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer
3391 ** value, it is set to the number of columns in the table, or to the
3392 ** largest index of any column of the table that is actually used.
3393 **
3394 ** This instruction works just like OpenRead except that it opens the cursor
3395 ** in read/write mode.  For a given table, there can be one or more read-only
3396 ** cursors or a single read/write cursor but not both.
3397 **
3398 ** See also OpenRead.
3399 */
3400 case OP_ReopenIdx: {
3401   int nField;
3402   KeyInfo *pKeyInfo;
3403   int p2;
3404   int iDb;
3405   int wrFlag;
3406   Btree *pX;
3407   VdbeCursor *pCur;
3408   Db *pDb;
3409 
3410   assert( pOp->p5==0 || pOp->p5==OPFLAG_SEEKEQ );
3411   assert( pOp->p4type==P4_KEYINFO );
3412   pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
3413   if( pCur && pCur->pgnoRoot==(u32)pOp->p2 ){
3414     assert( pCur->iDb==pOp->p3 );      /* Guaranteed by the code generator */
3415     goto open_cursor_set_hints;
3416   }
3417   /* If the cursor is not currently open or is open on a different
3418   ** index, then fall through into OP_OpenRead to force a reopen */
3419 case OP_OpenRead:
3420 case OP_OpenWrite:
3421 
3422   assert( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenWrite || pOp->p5==0 || pOp->p5==OPFLAG_SEEKEQ );
3423   assert( p->bIsReader );
3424   assert( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenRead || pOp->opcode==OP_ReopenIdx
3425           || p->readOnly==0 );
3426 
3427   if( p->expired ){
3428     rc = SQLITE_ABORT_ROLLBACK;
3429     goto abort_due_to_error;
3430   }
3431 
3432   nField = 0;
3433   pKeyInfo = 0;
3434   p2 = pOp->p2;
3435   iDb = pOp->p3;
3436   assert( iDb>=0 && iDb<db->nDb );
3437   assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, iDb) );
3438   pDb = &db->aDb[iDb];
3439   pX = pDb->pBt;
3440   assert( pX!=0 );
3441   if( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenWrite ){
3442     assert( OPFLAG_FORDELETE==BTREE_FORDELETE );
3443     wrFlag = BTREE_WRCSR | (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_FORDELETE);
3444     assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, iDb, 0) );
3445     if( pDb->pSchema->file_format < p->minWriteFileFormat ){
3446       p->minWriteFileFormat = pDb->pSchema->file_format;
3447     }
3448   }else{
3449     wrFlag = 0;
3450   }
3451   if( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_P2ISREG ){
3452     assert( p2>0 );
3453     assert( p2<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) );
3454     pIn2 = &aMem[p2];
3455     assert( memIsValid(pIn2) );
3456     assert( (pIn2->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 );
3457     sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pIn2);
3458     p2 = (int)pIn2->u.i;
3459     /* The p2 value always comes from a prior OP_CreateTable opcode and
3460     ** that opcode will always set the p2 value to 2 or more or else fail.
3461     ** If there were a failure, the prepared statement would have halted
3462     ** before reaching this instruction. */
3463     assert( p2>=2 );
3464   }
3465   if( pOp->p4type==P4_KEYINFO ){
3466     pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo;
3467     assert( pKeyInfo->enc==ENC(db) );
3468     assert( pKeyInfo->db==db );
3469     nField = pKeyInfo->nField+pKeyInfo->nXField;
3470   }else if( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ){
3471     nField = pOp->p4.i;
3472   }
3473   assert( pOp->p1>=0 );
3474   assert( nField>=0 );
3475   testcase( nField==0 );  /* Table with INTEGER PRIMARY KEY and nothing else */
3476   pCur = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, nField, iDb, CURTYPE_BTREE);
3477   if( pCur==0 ) goto no_mem;
3478   pCur->nullRow = 1;
3479   pCur->isOrdered = 1;
3480   pCur->pgnoRoot = p2;
3481 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
3482   pCur->wrFlag = wrFlag;
3483 #endif
3484   rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pX, p2, wrFlag, pKeyInfo, pCur->uc.pCursor);
3485   pCur->pKeyInfo = pKeyInfo;
3486   /* Set the VdbeCursor.isTable variable. Previous versions of
3487   ** SQLite used to check if the root-page flags were sane at this point
3488   ** and report database corruption if they were not, but this check has
3489   ** since moved into the btree layer.  */
3490   pCur->isTable = pOp->p4type!=P4_KEYINFO;
3491 
3492 open_cursor_set_hints:
3493   assert( OPFLAG_BULKCSR==BTREE_BULKLOAD );
3494   assert( OPFLAG_SEEKEQ==BTREE_SEEK_EQ );
3495   testcase( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_BULKCSR );
3496 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_CURSOR_HINTS
3497   testcase( pOp->p2 & OPFLAG_SEEKEQ );
3498 #endif
3499   sqlite3BtreeCursorHintFlags(pCur->uc.pCursor,
3500                                (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_BULKCSR|OPFLAG_SEEKEQ)));
3501   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
3502   break;
3503 }
3504 
3505 /* Opcode: OpenEphemeral P1 P2 * P4 P5
3506 ** Synopsis: nColumn=P2
3507 **
3508 ** Open a new cursor P1 to a transient table.
3509 ** The cursor is always opened read/write even if
3510 ** the main database is read-only.  The ephemeral
3511 ** table is deleted automatically when the cursor is closed.
3512 **
3513 ** P2 is the number of columns in the ephemeral table.
3514 ** The cursor points to a BTree table if P4==0 and to a BTree index
3515 ** if P4 is not 0.  If P4 is not NULL, it points to a KeyInfo structure
3516 ** that defines the format of keys in the index.
3517 **
3518 ** The P5 parameter can be a mask of the BTREE_* flags defined
3519 ** in btree.h.  These flags control aspects of the operation of
3520 ** the btree.  The BTREE_OMIT_JOURNAL and BTREE_SINGLE flags are
3521 ** added automatically.
3522 */
3523 /* Opcode: OpenAutoindex P1 P2 * P4 *
3524 ** Synopsis: nColumn=P2
3525 **
3526 ** This opcode works the same as OP_OpenEphemeral.  It has a
3527 ** different name to distinguish its use.  Tables created using
3528 ** by this opcode will be used for automatically created transient
3529 ** indices in joins.
3530 */
3531 case OP_OpenAutoindex:
3532 case OP_OpenEphemeral: {
3533   VdbeCursor *pCx;
3534   KeyInfo *pKeyInfo;
3535 
3536   static const int vfsFlags =
3537       SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE |
3538       SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE |
3539       SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE |
3540       SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE |
3541       SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB;
3542   assert( pOp->p1>=0 );
3543   assert( pOp->p2>=0 );
3544   pCx = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, pOp->p2, -1, CURTYPE_BTREE);
3545   if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem;
3546   pCx->nullRow = 1;
3547   pCx->isEphemeral = 1;
3548   rc = sqlite3BtreeOpen(db->pVfs, 0, db, &pCx->pBtx,
3549                         BTREE_OMIT_JOURNAL | BTREE_SINGLE | pOp->p5, vfsFlags);
3550   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
3551     rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(pCx->pBtx, 1);
3552   }
3553   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
3554     /* If a transient index is required, create it by calling
3555     ** sqlite3BtreeCreateTable() with the BTREE_BLOBKEY flag before
3556     ** opening it. If a transient table is required, just use the
3557     ** automatically created table with root-page 1 (an BLOB_INTKEY table).
3558     */
3559     if( (pCx->pKeyInfo = pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo)!=0 ){
3560       int pgno;
3561       assert( pOp->p4type==P4_KEYINFO );
3562       rc = sqlite3BtreeCreateTable(pCx->pBtx, &pgno, BTREE_BLOBKEY | pOp->p5);
3563       if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
3564         assert( pgno==MASTER_ROOT+1 );
3565         assert( pKeyInfo->db==db );
3566         assert( pKeyInfo->enc==ENC(db) );
3567         rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pCx->pBtx, pgno, BTREE_WRCSR,
3568                                 pKeyInfo, pCx->uc.pCursor);
3569       }
3570       pCx->isTable = 0;
3571     }else{
3572       rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pCx->pBtx, MASTER_ROOT, BTREE_WRCSR,
3573                               0, pCx->uc.pCursor);
3574       pCx->isTable = 1;
3575     }
3576   }
3577   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
3578   pCx->isOrdered = (pOp->p5!=BTREE_UNORDERED);
3579   break;
3580 }
3581 
3582 /* Opcode: SorterOpen P1 P2 P3 P4 *
3583 **
3584 ** This opcode works like OP_OpenEphemeral except that it opens
3585 ** a transient index that is specifically designed to sort large
3586 ** tables using an external merge-sort algorithm.
3587 **
3588 ** If argument P3 is non-zero, then it indicates that the sorter may
3589 ** assume that a stable sort considering the first P3 fields of each
3590 ** key is sufficient to produce the required results.
3591 */
3592 case OP_SorterOpen: {
3593   VdbeCursor *pCx;
3594 
3595   assert( pOp->p1>=0 );
3596   assert( pOp->p2>=0 );
3597   pCx = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, pOp->p2, -1, CURTYPE_SORTER);
3598   if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem;
3599   pCx->pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo;
3600   assert( pCx->pKeyInfo->db==db );
3601   assert( pCx->pKeyInfo->enc==ENC(db) );
3602   rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterInit(db, pOp->p3, pCx);
3603   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
3604   break;
3605 }
3606 
3607 /* Opcode: SequenceTest P1 P2 * * *
3608 ** Synopsis: if( cursor[P1].ctr++ ) pc = P2
3609 **
3610 ** P1 is a sorter cursor. If the sequence counter is currently zero, jump
3611 ** to P2. Regardless of whether or not the jump is taken, increment the
3612 ** the sequence value.
3613 */
3614 case OP_SequenceTest: {
3615   VdbeCursor *pC;
3616   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
3617   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
3618   assert( isSorter(pC) );
3619   if( (pC->seqCount++)==0 ){
3620     goto jump_to_p2;
3621   }
3622   break;
3623 }
3624 
3625 /* Opcode: OpenPseudo P1 P2 P3 * *
3626 ** Synopsis: P3 columns in r[P2]
3627 **
3628 ** Open a new cursor that points to a fake table that contains a single
3629 ** row of data.  The content of that one row is the content of memory
3630 ** register P2.  In other words, cursor P1 becomes an alias for the
3631 ** MEM_Blob content contained in register P2.
3632 **
3633 ** A pseudo-table created by this opcode is used to hold a single
3634 ** row output from the sorter so that the row can be decomposed into
3635 ** individual columns using the OP_Column opcode.  The OP_Column opcode
3636 ** is the only cursor opcode that works with a pseudo-table.
3637 **
3638 ** P3 is the number of fields in the records that will be stored by
3639 ** the pseudo-table.
3640 */
3641 case OP_OpenPseudo: {
3642   VdbeCursor *pCx;
3643 
3644   assert( pOp->p1>=0 );
3645   assert( pOp->p3>=0 );
3646   pCx = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, pOp->p3, -1, CURTYPE_PSEUDO);
3647   if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem;
3648   pCx->nullRow = 1;
3649   pCx->uc.pseudoTableReg = pOp->p2;
3650   pCx->isTable = 1;
3651   assert( pOp->p5==0 );
3652   break;
3653 }
3654 
3655 /* Opcode: Close P1 * * * *
3656 **
3657 ** Close a cursor previously opened as P1.  If P1 is not
3658 ** currently open, this instruction is a no-op.
3659 */
3660 case OP_Close: {
3661   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
3662   sqlite3VdbeFreeCursor(p, p->apCsr[pOp->p1]);
3663   p->apCsr[pOp->p1] = 0;
3664   break;
3665 }
3666 
3667 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_USED_MASK
3668 /* Opcode: ColumnsUsed P1 * * P4 *
3669 **
3670 ** This opcode (which only exists if SQLite was compiled with
3671 ** SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_USED_MASK) identifies which columns of the
3672 ** table or index for cursor P1 are used.  P4 is a 64-bit integer
3673 ** (P4_INT64) in which the first 63 bits are one for each of the
3674 ** first 63 columns of the table or index that are actually used
3675 ** by the cursor.  The high-order bit is set if any column after
3676 ** the 64th is used.
3677 */
3678 case OP_ColumnsUsed: {
3679   VdbeCursor *pC;
3680   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
3681   assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
3682   pC->maskUsed = *(u64*)pOp->p4.pI64;
3683   break;
3684 }
3685 #endif
3686 
3687 /* Opcode: SeekGE P1 P2 P3 P4 *
3688 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
3689 **
3690 ** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
3691 ** use the value in register P3 as the key.  If cursor P1 refers
3692 ** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
3693 ** that are used as an unpacked index key.
3694 **
3695 ** Reposition cursor P1 so that  it points to the smallest entry that
3696 ** is greater than or equal to the key value. If there are no records
3697 ** greater than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
3698 **
3699 ** If the cursor P1 was opened using the OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flag, then this
3700 ** opcode will always land on a record that equally equals the key, or
3701 ** else jump immediately to P2.  When the cursor is OPFLAG_SEEKEQ, this
3702 ** opcode must be followed by an IdxLE opcode with the same arguments.
3703 ** The IdxLE opcode will be skipped if this opcode succeeds, but the
3704 ** IdxLE opcode will be used on subsequent loop iterations.
3705 **
3706 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order,
3707 ** from the beginning toward the end.  In other words, the cursor is
3708 ** configured to use Next, not Prev.
3709 **
3710 ** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekLt, SeekGt, SeekLe
3711 */
3712 /* Opcode: SeekGT P1 P2 P3 P4 *
3713 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
3714 **
3715 ** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
3716 ** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
3717 ** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
3718 ** that are used as an unpacked index key.
3719 **
3720 ** Reposition cursor P1 so that  it points to the smallest entry that
3721 ** is greater than the key value. If there are no records greater than
3722 ** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
3723 **
3724 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order,
3725 ** from the beginning toward the end.  In other words, the cursor is
3726 ** configured to use Next, not Prev.
3727 **
3728 ** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekLt, SeekGe, SeekLe
3729 */
3730 /* Opcode: SeekLT P1 P2 P3 P4 *
3731 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
3732 **
3733 ** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
3734 ** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
3735 ** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
3736 ** that are used as an unpacked index key.
3737 **
3738 ** Reposition cursor P1 so that  it points to the largest entry that
3739 ** is less than the key value. If there are no records less than
3740 ** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
3741 **
3742 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order,
3743 ** from the end toward the beginning.  In other words, the cursor is
3744 ** configured to use Prev, not Next.
3745 **
3746 ** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekGt, SeekGe, SeekLe
3747 */
3748 /* Opcode: SeekLE P1 P2 P3 P4 *
3749 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
3750 **
3751 ** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
3752 ** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
3753 ** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
3754 ** that are used as an unpacked index key.
3755 **
3756 ** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that
3757 ** is less than or equal to the key value. If there are no records
3758 ** less than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
3759 **
3760 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order,
3761 ** from the end toward the beginning.  In other words, the cursor is
3762 ** configured to use Prev, not Next.
3763 **
3764 ** If the cursor P1 was opened using the OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flag, then this
3765 ** opcode will always land on a record that equally equals the key, or
3766 ** else jump immediately to P2.  When the cursor is OPFLAG_SEEKEQ, this
3767 ** opcode must be followed by an IdxGE opcode with the same arguments.
3768 ** The IdxGE opcode will be skipped if this opcode succeeds, but the
3769 ** IdxGE opcode will be used on subsequent loop iterations.
3770 **
3771 ** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekGt, SeekGe, SeekLt
3772 */
3773 case OP_SeekLT:         /* jump, in3 */
3774 case OP_SeekLE:         /* jump, in3 */
3775 case OP_SeekGE:         /* jump, in3 */
3776 case OP_SeekGT: {       /* jump, in3 */
3777   int res;           /* Comparison result */
3778   int oc;            /* Opcode */
3779   VdbeCursor *pC;    /* The cursor to seek */
3780   UnpackedRecord r;  /* The key to seek for */
3781   int nField;        /* Number of columns or fields in the key */
3782   i64 iKey;          /* The rowid we are to seek to */
3783   int eqOnly;        /* Only interested in == results */
3784 
3785   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
3786   assert( pOp->p2!=0 );
3787   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
3788   assert( pC!=0 );
3789   assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
3790   assert( OP_SeekLE == OP_SeekLT+1 );
3791   assert( OP_SeekGE == OP_SeekLT+2 );
3792   assert( OP_SeekGT == OP_SeekLT+3 );
3793   assert( pC->isOrdered );
3794   assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 );
3795   oc = pOp->opcode;
3796   eqOnly = 0;
3797   pC->nullRow = 0;
3798 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
3799   pC->seekOp = pOp->opcode;
3800 #endif
3801 
3802   if( pC->isTable ){
3803     /* The BTREE_SEEK_EQ flag is only set on index cursors */
3804     assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorHasHint(pC->uc.pCursor, BTREE_SEEK_EQ)==0
3805               || CORRUPT_DB );
3806 
3807     /* The input value in P3 might be of any type: integer, real, string,
3808     ** blob, or NULL.  But it needs to be an integer before we can do
3809     ** the seek, so convert it. */
3810     pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3];
3811     if( (pIn3->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real|MEM_Str))==MEM_Str ){
3812       applyNumericAffinity(pIn3, 0);
3813     }
3814     iKey = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn3);
3815 
3816     /* If the P3 value could not be converted into an integer without
3817     ** loss of information, then special processing is required... */
3818     if( (pIn3->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ){
3819       if( (pIn3->flags & MEM_Real)==0 ){
3820         /* If the P3 value cannot be converted into any kind of a number,
3821         ** then the seek is not possible, so jump to P2 */
3822         VdbeBranchTaken(1,2); goto jump_to_p2;
3823         break;
3824       }
3825 
3826       /* If the approximation iKey is larger than the actual real search
3827       ** term, substitute >= for > and < for <=. e.g. if the search term
3828       ** is 4.9 and the integer approximation 5:
3829       **
3830       **        (x >  4.9)    ->     (x >= 5)
3831       **        (x <= 4.9)    ->     (x <  5)
3832       */
3833       if( pIn3->u.r<(double)iKey ){
3834         assert( OP_SeekGE==(OP_SeekGT-1) );
3835         assert( OP_SeekLT==(OP_SeekLE-1) );
3836         assert( (OP_SeekLE & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekGT & 0x0001) );
3837         if( (oc & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekGT & 0x0001) ) oc--;
3838       }
3839 
3840       /* If the approximation iKey is smaller than the actual real search
3841       ** term, substitute <= for < and > for >=.  */
3842       else if( pIn3->u.r>(double)iKey ){
3843         assert( OP_SeekLE==(OP_SeekLT+1) );
3844         assert( OP_SeekGT==(OP_SeekGE+1) );
3845         assert( (OP_SeekLT & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekGE & 0x0001) );
3846         if( (oc & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekLT & 0x0001) ) oc++;
3847       }
3848     }
3849     rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pC->uc.pCursor, 0, (u64)iKey, 0, &res);
3850     pC->movetoTarget = iKey;  /* Used by OP_Delete */
3851     if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
3852       goto abort_due_to_error;
3853     }
3854   }else{
3855     /* For a cursor with the BTREE_SEEK_EQ hint, only the OP_SeekGE and
3856     ** OP_SeekLE opcodes are allowed, and these must be immediately followed
3857     ** by an OP_IdxGT or OP_IdxLT opcode, respectively, with the same key.
3858     */
3859     if( sqlite3BtreeCursorHasHint(pC->uc.pCursor, BTREE_SEEK_EQ) ){
3860       eqOnly = 1;
3861       assert( pOp->opcode==OP_SeekGE || pOp->opcode==OP_SeekLE );
3862       assert( pOp[1].opcode==OP_IdxLT || pOp[1].opcode==OP_IdxGT );
3863       assert( pOp[1].p1==pOp[0].p1 );
3864       assert( pOp[1].p2==pOp[0].p2 );
3865       assert( pOp[1].p3==pOp[0].p3 );
3866       assert( pOp[1].p4.i==pOp[0].p4.i );
3867     }
3868 
3869     nField = pOp->p4.i;
3870     assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 );
3871     assert( nField>0 );
3872     r.pKeyInfo = pC->pKeyInfo;
3873     r.nField = (u16)nField;
3874 
3875     /* The next line of code computes as follows, only faster:
3876     **   if( oc==OP_SeekGT || oc==OP_SeekLE ){
3877     **     r.default_rc = -1;
3878     **   }else{
3879     **     r.default_rc = +1;
3880     **   }
3881     */
3882     r.default_rc = ((1 & (oc - OP_SeekLT)) ? -1 : +1);
3883     assert( oc!=OP_SeekGT || r.default_rc==-1 );
3884     assert( oc!=OP_SeekLE || r.default_rc==-1 );
3885     assert( oc!=OP_SeekGE || r.default_rc==+1 );
3886     assert( oc!=OP_SeekLT || r.default_rc==+1 );
3887 
3888     r.aMem = &aMem[pOp->p3];
3889 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
3890     { int i; for(i=0; i<r.nField; i++) assert( memIsValid(&r.aMem[i]) ); }
3891 #endif
3892     r.eqSeen = 0;
3893     rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pC->uc.pCursor, &r, 0, 0, &res);
3894     if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
3895       goto abort_due_to_error;
3896     }
3897     if( eqOnly && r.eqSeen==0 ){
3898       assert( res!=0 );
3899       goto seek_not_found;
3900     }
3901   }
3902   pC->deferredMoveto = 0;
3903   pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
3904 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST
3905   sqlite3_search_count++;
3906 #endif
3907   if( oc>=OP_SeekGE ){  assert( oc==OP_SeekGE || oc==OP_SeekGT );
3908     if( res<0 || (res==0 && oc==OP_SeekGT) ){
3909       res = 0;
3910       rc = sqlite3BtreeNext(pC->uc.pCursor, &res);
3911       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error;
3912     }else{
3913       res = 0;
3914     }
3915   }else{
3916     assert( oc==OP_SeekLT || oc==OP_SeekLE );
3917     if( res>0 || (res==0 && oc==OP_SeekLT) ){
3918       res = 0;
3919       rc = sqlite3BtreePrevious(pC->uc.pCursor, &res);
3920       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error;
3921     }else{
3922       /* res might be negative because the table is empty.  Check to
3923       ** see if this is the case.
3924       */
3925       res = sqlite3BtreeEof(pC->uc.pCursor);
3926     }
3927   }
3928 seek_not_found:
3929   assert( pOp->p2>0 );
3930   VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2);
3931   if( res ){
3932     goto jump_to_p2;
3933   }else if( eqOnly ){
3934     assert( pOp[1].opcode==OP_IdxLT || pOp[1].opcode==OP_IdxGT );
3935     pOp++; /* Skip the OP_IdxLt or OP_IdxGT that follows */
3936   }
3937   break;
3938 }
3939 
3940 /* Opcode: Found P1 P2 P3 P4 *
3941 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
3942 **
3943 ** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord.  If
3944 ** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked
3945 ** record.
3946 **
3947 ** Cursor P1 is on an index btree.  If the record identified by P3 and P4
3948 ** is a prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2 and
3949 ** P1 is left pointing at the matching entry.
3950 **
3951 ** This operation leaves the cursor in a state where it can be
3952 ** advanced in the forward direction.  The Next instruction will work,
3953 ** but not the Prev instruction.
3954 **
3955 ** See also: NotFound, NoConflict, NotExists. SeekGe
3956 */
3957 /* Opcode: NotFound P1 P2 P3 P4 *
3958 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
3959 **
3960 ** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord.  If
3961 ** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked
3962 ** record.
3963 **
3964 ** Cursor P1 is on an index btree.  If the record identified by P3 and P4
3965 ** is not the prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2.  If P1
3966 ** does contain an entry whose prefix matches the P3/P4 record then control
3967 ** falls through to the next instruction and P1 is left pointing at the
3968 ** matching entry.
3969 **
3970 ** This operation leaves the cursor in a state where it cannot be
3971 ** advanced in either direction.  In other words, the Next and Prev
3972 ** opcodes do not work after this operation.
3973 **
3974 ** See also: Found, NotExists, NoConflict
3975 */
3976 /* Opcode: NoConflict P1 P2 P3 P4 *
3977 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
3978 **
3979 ** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord.  If
3980 ** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked
3981 ** record.
3982 **
3983 ** Cursor P1 is on an index btree.  If the record identified by P3 and P4
3984 ** contains any NULL value, jump immediately to P2.  If all terms of the
3985 ** record are not-NULL then a check is done to determine if any row in the
3986 ** P1 index btree has a matching key prefix.  If there are no matches, jump
3987 ** immediately to P2.  If there is a match, fall through and leave the P1
3988 ** cursor pointing to the matching row.
3989 **
3990 ** This opcode is similar to OP_NotFound with the exceptions that the
3991 ** branch is always taken if any part of the search key input is NULL.
3992 **
3993 ** This operation leaves the cursor in a state where it cannot be
3994 ** advanced in either direction.  In other words, the Next and Prev
3995 ** opcodes do not work after this operation.
3996 **
3997 ** See also: NotFound, Found, NotExists
3998 */
3999 case OP_NoConflict:     /* jump, in3 */
4000 case OP_NotFound:       /* jump, in3 */
4001 case OP_Found: {        /* jump, in3 */
4002   int alreadyExists;
4003   int takeJump;
4004   int ii;
4005   VdbeCursor *pC;
4006   int res;
4007   UnpackedRecord *pFree;
4008   UnpackedRecord *pIdxKey;
4009   UnpackedRecord r;
4010 
4011 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST
4012   if( pOp->opcode!=OP_NoConflict ) sqlite3_found_count++;
4013 #endif
4014 
4015   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
4016   assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 );
4017   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
4018   assert( pC!=0 );
4019 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
4020   pC->seekOp = pOp->opcode;
4021 #endif
4022   pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3];
4023   assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
4024   assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 );
4025   assert( pC->isTable==0 );
4026   if( pOp->p4.i>0 ){
4027     r.pKeyInfo = pC->pKeyInfo;
4028     r.nField = (u16)pOp->p4.i;
4029     r.aMem = pIn3;
4030 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
4031     for(ii=0; ii<r.nField; ii++){
4032       assert( memIsValid(&r.aMem[ii]) );
4033       assert( (r.aMem[ii].flags & MEM_Zero)==0 || r.aMem[ii].n==0 );
4034       if( ii ) REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3+ii, &r.aMem[ii]);
4035     }
4036 #endif
4037     pIdxKey = &r;
4038     pFree = 0;
4039   }else{
4040     pFree = pIdxKey = sqlite3VdbeAllocUnpackedRecord(pC->pKeyInfo);
4041     if( pIdxKey==0 ) goto no_mem;
4042     assert( pIn3->flags & MEM_Blob );
4043     (void)ExpandBlob(pIn3);
4044     sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack(pC->pKeyInfo, pIn3->n, pIn3->z, pIdxKey);
4045   }
4046   pIdxKey->default_rc = 0;
4047   takeJump = 0;
4048   if( pOp->opcode==OP_NoConflict ){
4049     /* For the OP_NoConflict opcode, take the jump if any of the
4050     ** input fields are NULL, since any key with a NULL will not
4051     ** conflict */
4052     for(ii=0; ii<pIdxKey->nField; ii++){
4053       if( pIdxKey->aMem[ii].flags & MEM_Null ){
4054         takeJump = 1;
4055         break;
4056       }
4057     }
4058   }
4059   rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pC->uc.pCursor, pIdxKey, 0, 0, &res);
4060   if( pFree ) sqlite3DbFree(db, pFree);
4061   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
4062     goto abort_due_to_error;
4063   }
4064   pC->seekResult = res;
4065   alreadyExists = (res==0);
4066   pC->nullRow = 1-alreadyExists;
4067   pC->deferredMoveto = 0;
4068   pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
4069   if( pOp->opcode==OP_Found ){
4070     VdbeBranchTaken(alreadyExists!=0,2);
4071     if( alreadyExists ) goto jump_to_p2;
4072   }else{
4073     VdbeBranchTaken(takeJump||alreadyExists==0,2);
4074     if( takeJump || !alreadyExists ) goto jump_to_p2;
4075   }
4076   break;
4077 }
4078 
4079 /* Opcode: SeekRowid P1 P2 P3 * *
4080 ** Synopsis: intkey=r[P3]
4081 **
4082 ** P1 is the index of a cursor open on an SQL table btree (with integer
4083 ** keys).  If register P3 does not contain an integer or if P1 does not
4084 ** contain a record with rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2.
4085 ** Or, if P2 is 0, raise an SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain
4086 ** a record with rowid P3 then
4087 ** leave the cursor pointing at that record and fall through to the next
4088 ** instruction.
4089 **
4090 ** The OP_NotExists opcode performs the same operation, but with OP_NotExists
4091 ** the P3 register must be guaranteed to contain an integer value.  With this
4092 ** opcode, register P3 might not contain an integer.
4093 **
4094 ** The OP_NotFound opcode performs the same operation on index btrees
4095 ** (with arbitrary multi-value keys).
4096 **
4097 ** This opcode leaves the cursor in a state where it cannot be advanced
4098 ** in either direction.  In other words, the Next and Prev opcodes will
4099 ** not work following this opcode.
4100 **
4101 ** See also: Found, NotFound, NoConflict, SeekRowid
4102 */
4103 /* Opcode: NotExists P1 P2 P3 * *
4104 ** Synopsis: intkey=r[P3]
4105 **
4106 ** P1 is the index of a cursor open on an SQL table btree (with integer
4107 ** keys).  P3 is an integer rowid.  If P1 does not contain a record with
4108 ** rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2.  Or, if P2 is 0, raise an
4109 ** SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain a record with rowid P3 then
4110 ** leave the cursor pointing at that record and fall through to the next
4111 ** instruction.
4112 **
4113 ** The OP_SeekRowid opcode performs the same operation but also allows the
4114 ** P3 register to contain a non-integer value, in which case the jump is
4115 ** always taken.  This opcode requires that P3 always contain an integer.
4116 **
4117 ** The OP_NotFound opcode performs the same operation on index btrees
4118 ** (with arbitrary multi-value keys).
4119 **
4120 ** This opcode leaves the cursor in a state where it cannot be advanced
4121 ** in either direction.  In other words, the Next and Prev opcodes will
4122 ** not work following this opcode.
4123 **
4124 ** See also: Found, NotFound, NoConflict, SeekRowid
4125 */
4126 case OP_SeekRowid: {        /* jump, in3 */
4127   VdbeCursor *pC;
4128   BtCursor *pCrsr;
4129   int res;
4130   u64 iKey;
4131 
4132   pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3];
4133   if( (pIn3->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ){
4134     applyAffinity(pIn3, SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC, encoding);
4135     if( (pIn3->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ) goto jump_to_p2;
4136   }
4137   /* Fall through into OP_NotExists */
4138 case OP_NotExists:          /* jump, in3 */
4139   pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3];
4140   assert( pIn3->flags & MEM_Int );
4141   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
4142   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
4143   assert( pC!=0 );
4144 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
4145   pC->seekOp = 0;
4146 #endif
4147   assert( pC->isTable );
4148   assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
4149   pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor;
4150   assert( pCrsr!=0 );
4151   res = 0;
4152   iKey = pIn3->u.i;
4153   rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pCrsr, 0, iKey, 0, &res);
4154   assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || res==0 );
4155   pC->movetoTarget = iKey;  /* Used by OP_Delete */
4156   pC->nullRow = 0;
4157   pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
4158   pC->deferredMoveto = 0;
4159   VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2);
4160   pC->seekResult = res;
4161   if( res!=0 ){
4162     assert( rc==SQLITE_OK );
4163     if( pOp->p2==0 ){
4164       rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
4165     }else{
4166       goto jump_to_p2;
4167     }
4168   }
4169   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
4170   break;
4171 }
4172 
4173 /* Opcode: Sequence P1 P2 * * *
4174 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=cursor[P1].ctr++
4175 **
4176 ** Find the next available sequence number for cursor P1.
4177 ** Write the sequence number into register P2.
4178 ** The sequence number on the cursor is incremented after this
4179 ** instruction.
4180 */
4181 case OP_Sequence: {           /* out2 */
4182   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
4183   assert( p->apCsr[pOp->p1]!=0 );
4184   assert( p->apCsr[pOp->p1]->eCurType!=CURTYPE_VTAB );
4185   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
4186   pOut->u.i = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]->seqCount++;
4187   break;
4188 }
4189 
4190 
4191 /* Opcode: NewRowid P1 P2 P3 * *
4192 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=rowid
4193 **
4194 ** Get a new integer record number (a.k.a "rowid") used as the key to a table.
4195 ** The record number is not previously used as a key in the database
4196 ** table that cursor P1 points to.  The new record number is written
4197 ** written to register P2.
4198 **
4199 ** If P3>0 then P3 is a register in the root frame of this VDBE that holds
4200 ** the largest previously generated record number. No new record numbers are
4201 ** allowed to be less than this value. When this value reaches its maximum,
4202 ** an SQLITE_FULL error is generated. The P3 register is updated with the '
4203 ** generated record number. This P3 mechanism is used to help implement the
4204 ** AUTOINCREMENT feature.
4205 */
4206 case OP_NewRowid: {           /* out2 */
4207   i64 v;                 /* The new rowid */
4208   VdbeCursor *pC;        /* Cursor of table to get the new rowid */
4209   int res;               /* Result of an sqlite3BtreeLast() */
4210   int cnt;               /* Counter to limit the number of searches */
4211   Mem *pMem;             /* Register holding largest rowid for AUTOINCREMENT */
4212   VdbeFrame *pFrame;     /* Root frame of VDBE */
4213 
4214   v = 0;
4215   res = 0;
4216   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
4217   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
4218   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
4219   assert( pC!=0 );
4220   assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
4221   assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 );
4222   {
4223     /* The next rowid or record number (different terms for the same
4224     ** thing) is obtained in a two-step algorithm.
4225     **
4226     ** First we attempt to find the largest existing rowid and add one
4227     ** to that.  But if the largest existing rowid is already the maximum
4228     ** positive integer, we have to fall through to the second
4229     ** probabilistic algorithm
4230     **
4231     ** The second algorithm is to select a rowid at random and see if
4232     ** it already exists in the table.  If it does not exist, we have
4233     ** succeeded.  If the random rowid does exist, we select a new one
4234     ** and try again, up to 100 times.
4235     */
4236     assert( pC->isTable );
4237 
4238 #ifdef SQLITE_32BIT_ROWID
4239 #   define MAX_ROWID 0x7fffffff
4240 #else
4241     /* Some compilers complain about constants of the form 0x7fffffffffffffff.
4242     ** Others complain about 0x7ffffffffffffffffLL.  The following macro seems
4243     ** to provide the constant while making all compilers happy.
4244     */
4245 #   define MAX_ROWID  (i64)( (((u64)0x7fffffff)<<32) | (u64)0xffffffff )
4246 #endif
4247 
4248     if( !pC->useRandomRowid ){
4249       rc = sqlite3BtreeLast(pC->uc.pCursor, &res);
4250       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
4251         goto abort_due_to_error;
4252       }
4253       if( res ){
4254         v = 1;   /* IMP: R-61914-48074 */
4255       }else{
4256         assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pC->uc.pCursor) );
4257         v = sqlite3BtreeIntegerKey(pC->uc.pCursor);
4258         if( v>=MAX_ROWID ){
4259           pC->useRandomRowid = 1;
4260         }else{
4261           v++;   /* IMP: R-29538-34987 */
4262         }
4263       }
4264     }
4265 
4266 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT
4267     if( pOp->p3 ){
4268       /* Assert that P3 is a valid memory cell. */
4269       assert( pOp->p3>0 );
4270       if( p->pFrame ){
4271         for(pFrame=p->pFrame; pFrame->pParent; pFrame=pFrame->pParent);
4272         /* Assert that P3 is a valid memory cell. */
4273         assert( pOp->p3<=pFrame->nMem );
4274         pMem = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p3];
4275       }else{
4276         /* Assert that P3 is a valid memory cell. */
4277         assert( pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) );
4278         pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3];
4279         memAboutToChange(p, pMem);
4280       }
4281       assert( memIsValid(pMem) );
4282 
4283       REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pMem);
4284       sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pMem);
4285       assert( (pMem->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 );  /* mem(P3) holds an integer */
4286       if( pMem->u.i==MAX_ROWID || pC->useRandomRowid ){
4287         rc = SQLITE_FULL;   /* IMP: R-17817-00630 */
4288         goto abort_due_to_error;
4289       }
4290       if( v<pMem->u.i+1 ){
4291         v = pMem->u.i + 1;
4292       }
4293       pMem->u.i = v;
4294     }
4295 #endif
4296     if( pC->useRandomRowid ){
4297       /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-07677-41881 If the largest ROWID is equal to the
4298       ** largest possible integer (9223372036854775807) then the database
4299       ** engine starts picking positive candidate ROWIDs at random until
4300       ** it finds one that is not previously used. */
4301       assert( pOp->p3==0 );  /* We cannot be in random rowid mode if this is
4302                              ** an AUTOINCREMENT table. */
4303       cnt = 0;
4304       do{
4305         sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(v), &v);
4306         v &= (MAX_ROWID>>1); v++;  /* Ensure that v is greater than zero */
4307       }while(  ((rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pC->uc.pCursor, 0, (u64)v,
4308                                                  0, &res))==SQLITE_OK)
4309             && (res==0)
4310             && (++cnt<100));
4311       if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
4312       if( res==0 ){
4313         rc = SQLITE_FULL;   /* IMP: R-38219-53002 */
4314         goto abort_due_to_error;
4315       }
4316       assert( v>0 );  /* EV: R-40812-03570 */
4317     }
4318     pC->deferredMoveto = 0;
4319     pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
4320   }
4321   pOut->u.i = v;
4322   break;
4323 }
4324 
4325 /* Opcode: Insert P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
4326 ** Synopsis: intkey=r[P3] data=r[P2]
4327 **
4328 ** Write an entry into the table of cursor P1.  A new entry is
4329 ** created if it doesn't already exist or the data for an existing
4330 ** entry is overwritten.  The data is the value MEM_Blob stored in register
4331 ** number P2. The key is stored in register P3. The key must
4332 ** be a MEM_Int.
4333 **
4334 ** If the OPFLAG_NCHANGE flag of P5 is set, then the row change count is
4335 ** incremented (otherwise not).  If the OPFLAG_LASTROWID flag of P5 is set,
4336 ** then rowid is stored for subsequent return by the
4337 ** sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() function (otherwise it is unmodified).
4338 **
4339 ** If the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT flag of P5 is set, the implementation might
4340 ** run faster by avoiding an unnecessary seek on cursor P1.  However,
4341 ** the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT flag must only be set if there have been no prior
4342 ** seeks on the cursor or if the most recent seek used a key equal to P3.
4343 **
4344 ** If the OPFLAG_ISUPDATE flag is set, then this opcode is part of an
4345 ** UPDATE operation.  Otherwise (if the flag is clear) then this opcode
4346 ** is part of an INSERT operation.  The difference is only important to
4347 ** the update hook.
4348 **
4349 ** Parameter P4 may point to a Table structure, or may be NULL. If it is
4350 ** not NULL, then the update-hook (sqlite3.xUpdateCallback) is invoked
4351 ** following a successful insert.
4352 **
4353 ** (WARNING/TODO: If P1 is a pseudo-cursor and P2 is dynamically
4354 ** allocated, then ownership of P2 is transferred to the pseudo-cursor
4355 ** and register P2 becomes ephemeral.  If the cursor is changed, the
4356 ** value of register P2 will then change.  Make sure this does not
4357 ** cause any problems.)
4358 **
4359 ** This instruction only works on tables.  The equivalent instruction
4360 ** for indices is OP_IdxInsert.
4361 */
4362 /* Opcode: InsertInt P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
4363 ** Synopsis: intkey=P3 data=r[P2]
4364 **
4365 ** This works exactly like OP_Insert except that the key is the
4366 ** integer value P3, not the value of the integer stored in register P3.
4367 */
4368 case OP_Insert:
4369 case OP_InsertInt: {
4370   Mem *pData;       /* MEM cell holding data for the record to be inserted */
4371   Mem *pKey;        /* MEM cell holding key  for the record */
4372   VdbeCursor *pC;   /* Cursor to table into which insert is written */
4373   int seekResult;   /* Result of prior seek or 0 if no USESEEKRESULT flag */
4374   const char *zDb;  /* database name - used by the update hook */
4375   Table *pTab;      /* Table structure - used by update and pre-update hooks */
4376   int op;           /* Opcode for update hook: SQLITE_UPDATE or SQLITE_INSERT */
4377   BtreePayload x;   /* Payload to be inserted */
4378 
4379   op = 0;
4380   pData = &aMem[pOp->p2];
4381   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
4382   assert( memIsValid(pData) );
4383   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
4384   assert( pC!=0 );
4385   assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
4386   assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 );
4387   assert( pC->isTable );
4388   assert( pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE || pOp->p4type>=P4_STATIC );
4389   REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2, pData);
4390 
4391   if( pOp->opcode==OP_Insert ){
4392     pKey = &aMem[pOp->p3];
4393     assert( pKey->flags & MEM_Int );
4394     assert( memIsValid(pKey) );
4395     REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pKey);
4396     x.nKey = pKey->u.i;
4397   }else{
4398     assert( pOp->opcode==OP_InsertInt );
4399     x.nKey = pOp->p3;
4400   }
4401 
4402   if( pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE && HAS_UPDATE_HOOK(db) ){
4403     assert( pC->isTable );
4404     assert( pC->iDb>=0 );
4405     zDb = db->aDb[pC->iDb].zDbSName;
4406     pTab = pOp->p4.pTab;
4407     assert( HasRowid(pTab) );
4408     op = ((pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) ? SQLITE_UPDATE : SQLITE_INSERT);
4409   }else{
4410     pTab = 0; /* Not needed.  Silence a comiler warning. */
4411     zDb = 0;  /* Not needed.  Silence a compiler warning. */
4412   }
4413 
4414 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK
4415   /* Invoke the pre-update hook, if any */
4416   if( db->xPreUpdateCallback
4417    && pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE
4418    && !(pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE)
4419   ){
4420     sqlite3VdbePreUpdateHook(p, pC, SQLITE_INSERT, zDb, pTab, x.nKey, pOp->p2);
4421   }
4422 #endif
4423 
4424   if( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_NCHANGE ) p->nChange++;
4425   if( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_LASTROWID ) db->lastRowid = x.nKey;
4426   if( pData->flags & MEM_Null ){
4427     x.pData = 0;
4428     x.nData = 0;
4429   }else{
4430     assert( pData->flags & (MEM_Blob|MEM_Str) );
4431     x.pData = pData->z;
4432     x.nData = pData->n;
4433   }
4434   seekResult = ((pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT) ? pC->seekResult : 0);
4435   if( pData->flags & MEM_Zero ){
4436     x.nZero = pData->u.nZero;
4437   }else{
4438     x.nZero = 0;
4439   }
4440   x.pKey = 0;
4441   rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pC->uc.pCursor, &x,
4442       (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_APPEND|OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION)), seekResult
4443   );
4444   pC->deferredMoveto = 0;
4445   pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
4446 
4447   /* Invoke the update-hook if required. */
4448   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
4449   if( db->xUpdateCallback && op ){
4450     db->xUpdateCallback(db->pUpdateArg, op, zDb, pTab->zName, x.nKey);
4451   }
4452   break;
4453 }
4454 
4455 /* Opcode: Delete P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
4456 **
4457 ** Delete the record at which the P1 cursor is currently pointing.
4458 **
4459 ** If the OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION bit of the P5 parameter is set, then
4460 ** the cursor will be left pointing at  either the next or the previous
4461 ** record in the table. If it is left pointing at the next record, then
4462 ** the next Next instruction will be a no-op. As a result, in this case
4463 ** it is ok to delete a record from within a Next loop. If
4464 ** OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION bit of P5 is clear, then the cursor will be
4465 ** left in an undefined state.
4466 **
4467 ** If the OPFLAG_AUXDELETE bit is set on P5, that indicates that this
4468 ** delete one of several associated with deleting a table row and all its
4469 ** associated index entries.  Exactly one of those deletes is the "primary"
4470 ** delete.  The others are all on OPFLAG_FORDELETE cursors or else are
4471 ** marked with the AUXDELETE flag.
4472 **
4473 ** If the OPFLAG_NCHANGE flag of P2 (NB: P2 not P5) is set, then the row
4474 ** change count is incremented (otherwise not).
4475 **
4476 ** P1 must not be pseudo-table.  It has to be a real table with
4477 ** multiple rows.
4478 **
4479 ** If P4 is not NULL then it points to a Table object. In this case either
4480 ** the update or pre-update hook, or both, may be invoked. The P1 cursor must
4481 ** have been positioned using OP_NotFound prior to invoking this opcode in
4482 ** this case. Specifically, if one is configured, the pre-update hook is
4483 ** invoked if P4 is not NULL. The update-hook is invoked if one is configured,
4484 ** P4 is not NULL, and the OPFLAG_NCHANGE flag is set in P2.
4485 **
4486 ** If the OPFLAG_ISUPDATE flag is set in P2, then P3 contains the address
4487 ** of the memory cell that contains the value that the rowid of the row will
4488 ** be set to by the update.
4489 */
4490 case OP_Delete: {
4491   VdbeCursor *pC;
4492   const char *zDb;
4493   Table *pTab;
4494   int opflags;
4495 
4496   opflags = pOp->p2;
4497   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
4498   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
4499   assert( pC!=0 );
4500   assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
4501   assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 );
4502   assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 );
4503 
4504 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
4505   if( pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE && HasRowid(pOp->p4.pTab) && pOp->p5==0 ){
4506     /* If p5 is zero, the seek operation that positioned the cursor prior to
4507     ** OP_Delete will have also set the pC->movetoTarget field to the rowid of
4508     ** the row that is being deleted */
4509     i64 iKey = sqlite3BtreeIntegerKey(pC->uc.pCursor);
4510     assert( pC->movetoTarget==iKey );
4511   }
4512 #endif
4513 
4514   /* If the update-hook or pre-update-hook will be invoked, set zDb to
4515   ** the name of the db to pass as to it. Also set local pTab to a copy
4516   ** of p4.pTab. Finally, if p5 is true, indicating that this cursor was
4517   ** last moved with OP_Next or OP_Prev, not Seek or NotFound, set
4518   ** VdbeCursor.movetoTarget to the current rowid.  */
4519   if( pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE && HAS_UPDATE_HOOK(db) ){
4520     assert( pC->iDb>=0 );
4521     assert( pOp->p4.pTab!=0 );
4522     zDb = db->aDb[pC->iDb].zDbSName;
4523     pTab = pOp->p4.pTab;
4524     if( (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION)!=0 && pC->isTable ){
4525       pC->movetoTarget = sqlite3BtreeIntegerKey(pC->uc.pCursor);
4526     }
4527   }else{
4528     zDb = 0;   /* Not needed.  Silence a compiler warning. */
4529     pTab = 0;  /* Not needed.  Silence a compiler warning. */
4530   }
4531 
4532 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK
4533   /* Invoke the pre-update-hook if required. */
4534   if( db->xPreUpdateCallback && pOp->p4.pTab && HasRowid(pTab) ){
4535     assert( !(opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) || (aMem[pOp->p3].flags & MEM_Int) );
4536     sqlite3VdbePreUpdateHook(p, pC,
4537         (opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) ? SQLITE_UPDATE : SQLITE_DELETE,
4538         zDb, pTab, pC->movetoTarget,
4539         pOp->p3
4540     );
4541   }
4542   if( opflags & OPFLAG_ISNOOP ) break;
4543 #endif
4544 
4545   /* Only flags that can be set are SAVEPOISTION and AUXDELETE */
4546   assert( (pOp->p5 & ~(OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION|OPFLAG_AUXDELETE))==0 );
4547   assert( OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION==BTREE_SAVEPOSITION );
4548   assert( OPFLAG_AUXDELETE==BTREE_AUXDELETE );
4549 
4550 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
4551   if( p->pFrame==0 ){
4552     if( pC->isEphemeral==0
4553         && (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_AUXDELETE)==0
4554         && (pC->wrFlag & OPFLAG_FORDELETE)==0
4555       ){
4556       nExtraDelete++;
4557     }
4558     if( pOp->p2 & OPFLAG_NCHANGE ){
4559       nExtraDelete--;
4560     }
4561   }
4562 #endif
4563 
4564   rc = sqlite3BtreeDelete(pC->uc.pCursor, pOp->p5);
4565   pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
4566   pC->seekResult = 0;
4567   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
4568 
4569   /* Invoke the update-hook if required. */
4570   if( opflags & OPFLAG_NCHANGE ){
4571     p->nChange++;
4572     if( db->xUpdateCallback && HasRowid(pTab) ){
4573       db->xUpdateCallback(db->pUpdateArg, SQLITE_DELETE, zDb, pTab->zName,
4574           pC->movetoTarget);
4575       assert( pC->iDb>=0 );
4576     }
4577   }
4578 
4579   break;
4580 }
4581 /* Opcode: ResetCount * * * * *
4582 **
4583 ** The value of the change counter is copied to the database handle
4584 ** change counter (returned by subsequent calls to sqlite3_changes()).
4585 ** Then the VMs internal change counter resets to 0.
4586 ** This is used by trigger programs.
4587 */
4588 case OP_ResetCount: {
4589   sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(db, p->nChange);
4590   p->nChange = 0;
4591   break;
4592 }
4593 
4594 /* Opcode: SorterCompare P1 P2 P3 P4
4595 ** Synopsis: if key(P1)!=trim(r[P3],P4) goto P2
4596 **
4597 ** P1 is a sorter cursor. This instruction compares a prefix of the
4598 ** record blob in register P3 against a prefix of the entry that
4599 ** the sorter cursor currently points to.  Only the first P4 fields
4600 ** of r[P3] and the sorter record are compared.
4601 **
4602 ** If either P3 or the sorter contains a NULL in one of their significant
4603 ** fields (not counting the P4 fields at the end which are ignored) then
4604 ** the comparison is assumed to be equal.
4605 **
4606 ** Fall through to next instruction if the two records compare equal to
4607 ** each other.  Jump to P2 if they are different.
4608 */
4609 case OP_SorterCompare: {
4610   VdbeCursor *pC;
4611   int res;
4612   int nKeyCol;
4613 
4614   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
4615   assert( isSorter(pC) );
4616   assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 );
4617   pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3];
4618   nKeyCol = pOp->p4.i;
4619   res = 0;
4620   rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterCompare(pC, pIn3, nKeyCol, &res);
4621   VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2);
4622   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
4623   if( res ) goto jump_to_p2;
4624   break;
4625 };
4626 
4627 /* Opcode: SorterData P1 P2 P3 * *
4628 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=data
4629 **
4630 ** Write into register P2 the current sorter data for sorter cursor P1.
4631 ** Then clear the column header cache on cursor P3.
4632 **
4633 ** This opcode is normally use to move a record out of the sorter and into
4634 ** a register that is the source for a pseudo-table cursor created using
4635 ** OpenPseudo.  That pseudo-table cursor is the one that is identified by
4636 ** parameter P3.  Clearing the P3 column cache as part of this opcode saves
4637 ** us from having to issue a separate NullRow instruction to clear that cache.
4638 */
4639 case OP_SorterData: {
4640   VdbeCursor *pC;
4641 
4642   pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2];
4643   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
4644   assert( isSorter(pC) );
4645   rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterRowkey(pC, pOut);
4646   assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || (pOut->flags & MEM_Blob) );
4647   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
4648   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
4649   p->apCsr[pOp->p3]->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
4650   break;
4651 }
4652 
4653 /* Opcode: RowData P1 P2 P3 * *
4654 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=data
4655 **
4656 ** Write into register P2 the complete row content for the row at
4657 ** which cursor P1 is currently pointing.
4658 ** There is no interpretation of the data.
4659 ** It is just copied onto the P2 register exactly as
4660 ** it is found in the database file.
4661 **
4662 ** If cursor P1 is an index, then the content is the key of the row.
4663 ** If cursor P2 is a table, then the content extracted is the data.
4664 **
4665 ** If the P1 cursor must be pointing to a valid row (not a NULL row)
4666 ** of a real table, not a pseudo-table.
4667 **
4668 ** If P3!=0 then this opcode is allowed to make an ephermeral pointer
4669 ** into the database page.  That means that the content of the output
4670 ** register will be invalidated as soon as the cursor moves - including
4671 ** moves caused by other cursors that "save" the the current cursors
4672 ** position in order that they can write to the same table.  If P3==0
4673 ** then a copy of the data is made into memory.  P3!=0 is faster, but
4674 ** P3==0 is safer.
4675 **
4676 ** If P3!=0 then the content of the P2 register is unsuitable for use
4677 ** in OP_Result and any OP_Result will invalidate the P2 register content.
4678 ** The P2 register content is invalidated by opcodes like OP_Function or
4679 ** by any use of another cursor pointing to the same table.
4680 */
4681 case OP_RowData: {
4682   VdbeCursor *pC;
4683   BtCursor *pCrsr;
4684   u32 n;
4685 
4686   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
4687 
4688   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
4689   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
4690   assert( pC!=0 );
4691   assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
4692   assert( isSorter(pC)==0 );
4693   assert( pC->nullRow==0 );
4694   assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 );
4695   pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor;
4696 
4697   /* The OP_RowData opcodes always follow OP_NotExists or
4698   ** OP_SeekRowid or OP_Rewind/Op_Next with no intervening instructions
4699   ** that might invalidate the cursor.
4700   ** If this where not the case, on of the following assert()s
4701   ** would fail.  Should this ever change (because of changes in the code
4702   ** generator) then the fix would be to insert a call to
4703   ** sqlite3VdbeCursorMoveto().
4704   */
4705   assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 );
4706   assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCrsr) );
4707 #if 0  /* Not required due to the previous to assert() statements */
4708   rc = sqlite3VdbeCursorMoveto(pC);
4709   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error;
4710 #endif
4711 
4712   n = sqlite3BtreePayloadSize(pCrsr);
4713   if( n>(u32)db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ){
4714     goto too_big;
4715   }
4716   testcase( n==0 );
4717   rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtree(pCrsr, 0, n, pOut);
4718   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
4719   if( !pOp->p3 ) Deephemeralize(pOut);
4720   UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut);
4721   REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2, pOut);
4722   break;
4723 }
4724 
4725 /* Opcode: Rowid P1 P2 * * *
4726 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=rowid
4727 **
4728 ** Store in register P2 an integer which is the key of the table entry that
4729 ** P1 is currently point to.
4730 **
4731 ** P1 can be either an ordinary table or a virtual table.  There used to
4732 ** be a separate OP_VRowid opcode for use with virtual tables, but this
4733 ** one opcode now works for both table types.
4734 */
4735 case OP_Rowid: {                 /* out2 */
4736   VdbeCursor *pC;
4737   i64 v;
4738   sqlite3_vtab *pVtab;
4739   const sqlite3_module *pModule;
4740 
4741   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
4742   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
4743   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
4744   assert( pC!=0 );
4745   assert( pC->eCurType!=CURTYPE_PSEUDO || pC->nullRow );
4746   if( pC->nullRow ){
4747     pOut->flags = MEM_Null;
4748     break;
4749   }else if( pC->deferredMoveto ){
4750     v = pC->movetoTarget;
4751 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
4752   }else if( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_VTAB ){
4753     assert( pC->uc.pVCur!=0 );
4754     pVtab = pC->uc.pVCur->pVtab;
4755     pModule = pVtab->pModule;
4756     assert( pModule->xRowid );
4757     rc = pModule->xRowid(pC->uc.pVCur, &v);
4758     sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab);
4759     if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
4760 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */
4761   }else{
4762     assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
4763     assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 );
4764     rc = sqlite3VdbeCursorRestore(pC);
4765     if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
4766     if( pC->nullRow ){
4767       pOut->flags = MEM_Null;
4768       break;
4769     }
4770     v = sqlite3BtreeIntegerKey(pC->uc.pCursor);
4771   }
4772   pOut->u.i = v;
4773   break;
4774 }
4775 
4776 /* Opcode: NullRow P1 * * * *
4777 **
4778 ** Move the cursor P1 to a null row.  Any OP_Column operations
4779 ** that occur while the cursor is on the null row will always
4780 ** write a NULL.
4781 */
4782 case OP_NullRow: {
4783   VdbeCursor *pC;
4784 
4785   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
4786   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
4787   assert( pC!=0 );
4788   pC->nullRow = 1;
4789   pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
4790   if( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ){
4791     assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 );
4792     sqlite3BtreeClearCursor(pC->uc.pCursor);
4793   }
4794   break;
4795 }
4796 
4797 /* Opcode: Last P1 P2 P3 * *
4798 **
4799 ** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Prev instruction for P1
4800 ** will refer to the last entry in the database table or index.
4801 ** If the table or index is empty and P2>0, then jump immediately to P2.
4802 ** If P2 is 0 or if the table or index is not empty, fall through
4803 ** to the following instruction.
4804 **
4805 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order,
4806 ** from the end toward the beginning.  In other words, the cursor is
4807 ** configured to use Prev, not Next.
4808 **
4809 ** If P3 is -1, then the cursor is positioned at the end of the btree
4810 ** for the purpose of appending a new entry onto the btree.  In that
4811 ** case P2 must be 0.  It is assumed that the cursor is used only for
4812 ** appending and so if the cursor is valid, then the cursor must already
4813 ** be pointing at the end of the btree and so no changes are made to
4814 ** the cursor.
4815 */
4816 case OP_Last: {        /* jump */
4817   VdbeCursor *pC;
4818   BtCursor *pCrsr;
4819   int res;
4820 
4821   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
4822   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
4823   assert( pC!=0 );
4824   assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
4825   pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor;
4826   res = 0;
4827   assert( pCrsr!=0 );
4828   pC->seekResult = pOp->p3;
4829 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
4830   pC->seekOp = OP_Last;
4831 #endif
4832   if( pOp->p3==0 || !sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValidNN(pCrsr) ){
4833     rc = sqlite3BtreeLast(pCrsr, &res);
4834     pC->nullRow = (u8)res;
4835     pC->deferredMoveto = 0;
4836     pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
4837     if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
4838     if( pOp->p2>0 ){
4839       VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2);
4840       if( res ) goto jump_to_p2;
4841     }
4842   }else{
4843     assert( pOp->p2==0 );
4844   }
4845   break;
4846 }
4847 
4848 
4849 /* Opcode: SorterSort P1 P2 * * *
4850 **
4851 ** After all records have been inserted into the Sorter object
4852 ** identified by P1, invoke this opcode to actually do the sorting.
4853 ** Jump to P2 if there are no records to be sorted.
4854 **
4855 ** This opcode is an alias for OP_Sort and OP_Rewind that is used
4856 ** for Sorter objects.
4857 */
4858 /* Opcode: Sort P1 P2 * * *
4859 **
4860 ** This opcode does exactly the same thing as OP_Rewind except that
4861 ** it increments an undocumented global variable used for testing.
4862 **
4863 ** Sorting is accomplished by writing records into a sorting index,
4864 ** then rewinding that index and playing it back from beginning to
4865 ** end.  We use the OP_Sort opcode instead of OP_Rewind to do the
4866 ** rewinding so that the global variable will be incremented and
4867 ** regression tests can determine whether or not the optimizer is
4868 ** correctly optimizing out sorts.
4869 */
4870 case OP_SorterSort:    /* jump */
4871 case OP_Sort: {        /* jump */
4872 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST
4873   sqlite3_sort_count++;
4874   sqlite3_search_count--;
4875 #endif
4876   p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_SORT]++;
4877   /* Fall through into OP_Rewind */
4878 }
4879 /* Opcode: Rewind P1 P2 * * *
4880 **
4881 ** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1
4882 ** will refer to the first entry in the database table or index.
4883 ** If the table or index is empty, jump immediately to P2.
4884 ** If the table or index is not empty, fall through to the following
4885 ** instruction.
4886 **
4887 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order,
4888 ** from the beginning toward the end.  In other words, the cursor is
4889 ** configured to use Next, not Prev.
4890 */
4891 case OP_Rewind: {        /* jump */
4892   VdbeCursor *pC;
4893   BtCursor *pCrsr;
4894   int res;
4895 
4896   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
4897   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
4898   assert( pC!=0 );
4899   assert( isSorter(pC)==(pOp->opcode==OP_SorterSort) );
4900   res = 1;
4901 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
4902   pC->seekOp = OP_Rewind;
4903 #endif
4904   if( isSorter(pC) ){
4905     rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterRewind(pC, &res);
4906   }else{
4907     assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
4908     pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor;
4909     assert( pCrsr );
4910     rc = sqlite3BtreeFirst(pCrsr, &res);
4911     pC->deferredMoveto = 0;
4912     pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
4913   }
4914   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
4915   pC->nullRow = (u8)res;
4916   assert( pOp->p2>0 && pOp->p2<p->nOp );
4917   VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2);
4918   if( res ) goto jump_to_p2;
4919   break;
4920 }
4921 
4922 /* Opcode: Next P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
4923 **
4924 ** Advance cursor P1 so that it points to the next key/data pair in its
4925 ** table or index.  If there are no more key/value pairs then fall through
4926 ** to the following instruction.  But if the cursor advance was successful,
4927 ** jump immediately to P2.
4928 **
4929 ** The Next opcode is only valid following an SeekGT, SeekGE, or
4930 ** OP_Rewind opcode used to position the cursor.  Next is not allowed
4931 ** to follow SeekLT, SeekLE, or OP_Last.
4932 **
4933 ** The P1 cursor must be for a real table, not a pseudo-table.  P1 must have
4934 ** been opened prior to this opcode or the program will segfault.
4935 **
4936 ** The P3 value is a hint to the btree implementation. If P3==1, that
4937 ** means P1 is an SQL index and that this instruction could have been
4938 ** omitted if that index had been unique.  P3 is usually 0.  P3 is
4939 ** always either 0 or 1.
4940 **
4941 ** P4 is always of type P4_ADVANCE. The function pointer points to
4942 ** sqlite3BtreeNext().
4943 **
4944 ** If P5 is positive and the jump is taken, then event counter
4945 ** number P5-1 in the prepared statement is incremented.
4946 **
4947 ** See also: Prev, NextIfOpen
4948 */
4949 /* Opcode: NextIfOpen P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
4950 **
4951 ** This opcode works just like Next except that if cursor P1 is not
4952 ** open it behaves a no-op.
4953 */
4954 /* Opcode: Prev P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
4955 **
4956 ** Back up cursor P1 so that it points to the previous key/data pair in its
4957 ** table or index.  If there is no previous key/value pairs then fall through
4958 ** to the following instruction.  But if the cursor backup was successful,
4959 ** jump immediately to P2.
4960 **
4961 **
4962 ** The Prev opcode is only valid following an SeekLT, SeekLE, or
4963 ** OP_Last opcode used to position the cursor.  Prev is not allowed
4964 ** to follow SeekGT, SeekGE, or OP_Rewind.
4965 **
4966 ** The P1 cursor must be for a real table, not a pseudo-table.  If P1 is
4967 ** not open then the behavior is undefined.
4968 **
4969 ** The P3 value is a hint to the btree implementation. If P3==1, that
4970 ** means P1 is an SQL index and that this instruction could have been
4971 ** omitted if that index had been unique.  P3 is usually 0.  P3 is
4972 ** always either 0 or 1.
4973 **
4974 ** P4 is always of type P4_ADVANCE. The function pointer points to
4975 ** sqlite3BtreePrevious().
4976 **
4977 ** If P5 is positive and the jump is taken, then event counter
4978 ** number P5-1 in the prepared statement is incremented.
4979 */
4980 /* Opcode: PrevIfOpen P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
4981 **
4982 ** This opcode works just like Prev except that if cursor P1 is not
4983 ** open it behaves a no-op.
4984 */
4985 /* Opcode: SorterNext P1 P2 * * P5
4986 **
4987 ** This opcode works just like OP_Next except that P1 must be a
4988 ** sorter object for which the OP_SorterSort opcode has been
4989 ** invoked.  This opcode advances the cursor to the next sorted
4990 ** record, or jumps to P2 if there are no more sorted records.
4991 */
4992 case OP_SorterNext: {  /* jump */
4993   VdbeCursor *pC;
4994   int res;
4995 
4996   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
4997   assert( isSorter(pC) );
4998   res = 0;
4999   rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterNext(db, pC, &res);
5000   goto next_tail;
5001 case OP_PrevIfOpen:    /* jump */
5002 case OP_NextIfOpen:    /* jump */
5003   if( p->apCsr[pOp->p1]==0 ) break;
5004   /* Fall through */
5005 case OP_Prev:          /* jump */
5006 case OP_Next:          /* jump */
5007   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
5008   assert( pOp->p5<ArraySize(p->aCounter) );
5009   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
5010   res = pOp->p3;
5011   assert( pC!=0 );
5012   assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 );
5013   assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
5014   assert( res==0 || (res==1 && pC->isTable==0) );
5015   testcase( res==1 );
5016   assert( pOp->opcode!=OP_Next || pOp->p4.xAdvance==sqlite3BtreeNext );
5017   assert( pOp->opcode!=OP_Prev || pOp->p4.xAdvance==sqlite3BtreePrevious );
5018   assert( pOp->opcode!=OP_NextIfOpen || pOp->p4.xAdvance==sqlite3BtreeNext );
5019   assert( pOp->opcode!=OP_PrevIfOpen || pOp->p4.xAdvance==sqlite3BtreePrevious);
5020 
5021   /* The Next opcode is only used after SeekGT, SeekGE, and Rewind.
5022   ** The Prev opcode is only used after SeekLT, SeekLE, and Last. */
5023   assert( pOp->opcode!=OP_Next || pOp->opcode!=OP_NextIfOpen
5024        || pC->seekOp==OP_SeekGT || pC->seekOp==OP_SeekGE
5025        || pC->seekOp==OP_Rewind || pC->seekOp==OP_Found);
5026   assert( pOp->opcode!=OP_Prev || pOp->opcode!=OP_PrevIfOpen
5027        || pC->seekOp==OP_SeekLT || pC->seekOp==OP_SeekLE
5028        || pC->seekOp==OP_Last );
5029 
5030   rc = pOp->p4.xAdvance(pC->uc.pCursor, &res);
5031 next_tail:
5032   pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
5033   VdbeBranchTaken(res==0,2);
5034   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
5035   if( res==0 ){
5036     pC->nullRow = 0;
5037     p->aCounter[pOp->p5]++;
5038 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST
5039     sqlite3_search_count++;
5040 #endif
5041     goto jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt;
5042   }else{
5043     pC->nullRow = 1;
5044   }
5045   goto check_for_interrupt;
5046 }
5047 
5048 /* Opcode: IdxInsert P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
5049 ** Synopsis: key=r[P2]
5050 **
5051 ** Register P2 holds an SQL index key made using the
5052 ** MakeRecord instructions.  This opcode writes that key
5053 ** into the index P1.  Data for the entry is nil.
5054 **
5055 ** If P4 is not zero, then it is the number of values in the unpacked
5056 ** key of reg(P2).  In that case, P3 is the index of the first register
5057 ** for the unpacked key.  The availability of the unpacked key can sometimes
5058 ** be an optimization.
5059 **
5060 ** If P5 has the OPFLAG_APPEND bit set, that is a hint to the b-tree layer
5061 ** that this insert is likely to be an append.
5062 **
5063 ** If P5 has the OPFLAG_NCHANGE bit set, then the change counter is
5064 ** incremented by this instruction.  If the OPFLAG_NCHANGE bit is clear,
5065 ** then the change counter is unchanged.
5066 **
5067 ** If the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT flag of P5 is set, the implementation might
5068 ** run faster by avoiding an unnecessary seek on cursor P1.  However,
5069 ** the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT flag must only be set if there have been no prior
5070 ** seeks on the cursor or if the most recent seek used a key equivalent
5071 ** to P2.
5072 **
5073 ** This instruction only works for indices.  The equivalent instruction
5074 ** for tables is OP_Insert.
5075 */
5076 /* Opcode: SorterInsert P1 P2 * * *
5077 ** Synopsis: key=r[P2]
5078 **
5079 ** Register P2 holds an SQL index key made using the
5080 ** MakeRecord instructions.  This opcode writes that key
5081 ** into the sorter P1.  Data for the entry is nil.
5082 */
5083 case OP_SorterInsert:       /* in2 */
5084 case OP_IdxInsert: {        /* in2 */
5085   VdbeCursor *pC;
5086   BtreePayload x;
5087 
5088   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
5089   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
5090   assert( pC!=0 );
5091   assert( isSorter(pC)==(pOp->opcode==OP_SorterInsert) );
5092   pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2];
5093   assert( pIn2->flags & MEM_Blob );
5094   if( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_NCHANGE ) p->nChange++;
5095   assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE || pOp->opcode==OP_SorterInsert );
5096   assert( pC->isTable==0 );
5097   rc = ExpandBlob(pIn2);
5098   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
5099   if( pOp->opcode==OP_SorterInsert ){
5100     rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterWrite(pC, pIn2);
5101   }else{
5102     x.nKey = pIn2->n;
5103     x.pKey = pIn2->z;
5104     x.aMem = aMem + pOp->p3;
5105     x.nMem = (u16)pOp->p4.i;
5106     rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pC->uc.pCursor, &x,
5107          (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_APPEND|OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION)),
5108         ((pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT) ? pC->seekResult : 0)
5109         );
5110     assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 );
5111     pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
5112   }
5113   if( rc) goto abort_due_to_error;
5114   break;
5115 }
5116 
5117 /* Opcode: IdxDelete P1 P2 P3 * *
5118 ** Synopsis: key=r[P2@P3]
5119 **
5120 ** The content of P3 registers starting at register P2 form
5121 ** an unpacked index key. This opcode removes that entry from the
5122 ** index opened by cursor P1.
5123 */
5124 case OP_IdxDelete: {
5125   VdbeCursor *pC;
5126   BtCursor *pCrsr;
5127   int res;
5128   UnpackedRecord r;
5129 
5130   assert( pOp->p3>0 );
5131   assert( pOp->p2>0 && pOp->p2+pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 );
5132   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
5133   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
5134   assert( pC!=0 );
5135   assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
5136   pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor;
5137   assert( pCrsr!=0 );
5138   assert( pOp->p5==0 );
5139   r.pKeyInfo = pC->pKeyInfo;
5140   r.nField = (u16)pOp->p3;
5141   r.default_rc = 0;
5142   r.aMem = &aMem[pOp->p2];
5143   rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pCrsr, &r, 0, 0, &res);
5144   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
5145   if( res==0 ){
5146     rc = sqlite3BtreeDelete(pCrsr, BTREE_AUXDELETE);
5147     if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
5148   }
5149   assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 );
5150   pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
5151   pC->seekResult = 0;
5152   break;
5153 }
5154 
5155 /* Opcode: Seek P1 * P3 P4 *
5156 ** Synopsis: Move P3 to P1.rowid
5157 **
5158 ** P1 is an open index cursor and P3 is a cursor on the corresponding
5159 ** table.  This opcode does a deferred seek of the P3 table cursor
5160 ** to the row that corresponds to the current row of P1.
5161 **
5162 ** This is a deferred seek.  Nothing actually happens until
5163 ** the cursor is used to read a record.  That way, if no reads
5164 ** occur, no unnecessary I/O happens.
5165 **
5166 ** P4 may be an array of integers (type P4_INTARRAY) containing
5167 ** one entry for each column in the P3 table.  If array entry a(i)
5168 ** is non-zero, then reading column a(i)-1 from cursor P3 is
5169 ** equivalent to performing the deferred seek and then reading column i
5170 ** from P1.  This information is stored in P3 and used to redirect
5171 ** reads against P3 over to P1, thus possibly avoiding the need to
5172 ** seek and read cursor P3.
5173 */
5174 /* Opcode: IdxRowid P1 P2 * * *
5175 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=rowid
5176 **
5177 ** Write into register P2 an integer which is the last entry in the record at
5178 ** the end of the index key pointed to by cursor P1.  This integer should be
5179 ** the rowid of the table entry to which this index entry points.
5180 **
5181 ** See also: Rowid, MakeRecord.
5182 */
5183 case OP_Seek:
5184 case OP_IdxRowid: {              /* out2 */
5185   VdbeCursor *pC;                /* The P1 index cursor */
5186   VdbeCursor *pTabCur;           /* The P2 table cursor (OP_Seek only) */
5187   i64 rowid;                     /* Rowid that P1 current points to */
5188 
5189   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
5190   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
5191   assert( pC!=0 );
5192   assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
5193   assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 );
5194   assert( pC->isTable==0 );
5195   assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 );
5196   assert( !pC->nullRow || pOp->opcode==OP_IdxRowid );
5197 
5198   /* The IdxRowid and Seek opcodes are combined because of the commonality
5199   ** of sqlite3VdbeCursorRestore() and sqlite3VdbeIdxRowid(). */
5200   rc = sqlite3VdbeCursorRestore(pC);
5201 
5202   /* sqlite3VbeCursorRestore() can only fail if the record has been deleted
5203   ** out from under the cursor.  That will never happens for an IdxRowid
5204   ** or Seek opcode */
5205   if( NEVER(rc!=SQLITE_OK) ) goto abort_due_to_error;
5206 
5207   if( !pC->nullRow ){
5208     rowid = 0;  /* Not needed.  Only used to silence a warning. */
5209     rc = sqlite3VdbeIdxRowid(db, pC->uc.pCursor, &rowid);
5210     if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
5211       goto abort_due_to_error;
5212     }
5213     if( pOp->opcode==OP_Seek ){
5214       assert( pOp->p3>=0 && pOp->p3<p->nCursor );
5215       pTabCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p3];
5216       assert( pTabCur!=0 );
5217       assert( pTabCur->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
5218       assert( pTabCur->uc.pCursor!=0 );
5219       assert( pTabCur->isTable );
5220       pTabCur->nullRow = 0;
5221       pTabCur->movetoTarget = rowid;
5222       pTabCur->deferredMoveto = 1;
5223       assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INTARRAY || pOp->p4.ai==0 );
5224       pTabCur->aAltMap = pOp->p4.ai;
5225       pTabCur->pAltCursor = pC;
5226     }else{
5227       pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
5228       pOut->u.i = rowid;
5229     }
5230   }else{
5231     assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxRowid );
5232     sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(&aMem[pOp->p2]);
5233   }
5234   break;
5235 }
5236 
5237 /* Opcode: IdxGE P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
5238 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
5239 **
5240 ** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
5241 ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY.  Compare this key value against the index
5242 ** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID
5243 ** fields at the end.
5244 **
5245 ** If the P1 index entry is greater than or equal to the key value
5246 ** then jump to P2.  Otherwise fall through to the next instruction.
5247 */
5248 /* Opcode: IdxGT P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
5249 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
5250 **
5251 ** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
5252 ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY.  Compare this key value against the index
5253 ** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID
5254 ** fields at the end.
5255 **
5256 ** If the P1 index entry is greater than the key value
5257 ** then jump to P2.  Otherwise fall through to the next instruction.
5258 */
5259 /* Opcode: IdxLT P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
5260 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
5261 **
5262 ** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
5263 ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID.  Compare this key value against
5264 ** the index that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or
5265 ** ROWID on the P1 index.
5266 **
5267 ** If the P1 index entry is less than the key value then jump to P2.
5268 ** Otherwise fall through to the next instruction.
5269 */
5270 /* Opcode: IdxLE P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
5271 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
5272 **
5273 ** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
5274 ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID.  Compare this key value against
5275 ** the index that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or
5276 ** ROWID on the P1 index.
5277 **
5278 ** If the P1 index entry is less than or equal to the key value then jump
5279 ** to P2. Otherwise fall through to the next instruction.
5280 */
5281 case OP_IdxLE:          /* jump */
5282 case OP_IdxGT:          /* jump */
5283 case OP_IdxLT:          /* jump */
5284 case OP_IdxGE:  {       /* jump */
5285   VdbeCursor *pC;
5286   int res;
5287   UnpackedRecord r;
5288 
5289   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
5290   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
5291   assert( pC!=0 );
5292   assert( pC->isOrdered );
5293   assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
5294   assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0);
5295   assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 );
5296   assert( pOp->p5==0 || pOp->p5==1 );
5297   assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 );
5298   r.pKeyInfo = pC->pKeyInfo;
5299   r.nField = (u16)pOp->p4.i;
5300   if( pOp->opcode<OP_IdxLT ){
5301     assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxLE || pOp->opcode==OP_IdxGT );
5302     r.default_rc = -1;
5303   }else{
5304     assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxGE || pOp->opcode==OP_IdxLT );
5305     r.default_rc = 0;
5306   }
5307   r.aMem = &aMem[pOp->p3];
5308 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
5309   { int i; for(i=0; i<r.nField; i++) assert( memIsValid(&r.aMem[i]) ); }
5310 #endif
5311   res = 0;  /* Not needed.  Only used to silence a warning. */
5312   rc = sqlite3VdbeIdxKeyCompare(db, pC, &r, &res);
5313   assert( (OP_IdxLE&1)==(OP_IdxLT&1) && (OP_IdxGE&1)==(OP_IdxGT&1) );
5314   if( (pOp->opcode&1)==(OP_IdxLT&1) ){
5315     assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxLE || pOp->opcode==OP_IdxLT );
5316     res = -res;
5317   }else{
5318     assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxGE || pOp->opcode==OP_IdxGT );
5319     res++;
5320   }
5321   VdbeBranchTaken(res>0,2);
5322   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
5323   if( res>0 ) goto jump_to_p2;
5324   break;
5325 }
5326 
5327 /* Opcode: Destroy P1 P2 P3 * *
5328 **
5329 ** Delete an entire database table or index whose root page in the database
5330 ** file is given by P1.
5331 **
5332 ** The table being destroyed is in the main database file if P3==0.  If
5333 ** P3==1 then the table to be clear is in the auxiliary database file
5334 ** that is used to store tables create using CREATE TEMPORARY TABLE.
5335 **
5336 ** If AUTOVACUUM is enabled then it is possible that another root page
5337 ** might be moved into the newly deleted root page in order to keep all
5338 ** root pages contiguous at the beginning of the database.  The former
5339 ** value of the root page that moved - its value before the move occurred -
5340 ** is stored in register P2.  If no page
5341 ** movement was required (because the table being dropped was already
5342 ** the last one in the database) then a zero is stored in register P2.
5343 ** If AUTOVACUUM is disabled then a zero is stored in register P2.
5344 **
5345 ** See also: Clear
5346 */
5347 case OP_Destroy: {     /* out2 */
5348   int iMoved;
5349   int iDb;
5350 
5351   assert( p->readOnly==0 );
5352   assert( pOp->p1>1 );
5353   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
5354   pOut->flags = MEM_Null;
5355   if( db->nVdbeRead > db->nVDestroy+1 ){
5356     rc = SQLITE_LOCKED;
5357     p->errorAction = OE_Abort;
5358     goto abort_due_to_error;
5359   }else{
5360     iDb = pOp->p3;
5361     assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, iDb) );
5362     iMoved = 0;  /* Not needed.  Only to silence a warning. */
5363     rc = sqlite3BtreeDropTable(db->aDb[iDb].pBt, pOp->p1, &iMoved);
5364     pOut->flags = MEM_Int;
5365     pOut->u.i = iMoved;
5366     if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
5367 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
5368     if( iMoved!=0 ){
5369       sqlite3RootPageMoved(db, iDb, iMoved, pOp->p1);
5370       /* All OP_Destroy operations occur on the same btree */
5371       assert( resetSchemaOnFault==0 || resetSchemaOnFault==iDb+1 );
5372       resetSchemaOnFault = iDb+1;
5373     }
5374 #endif
5375   }
5376   break;
5377 }
5378 
5379 /* Opcode: Clear P1 P2 P3
5380 **
5381 ** Delete all contents of the database table or index whose root page
5382 ** in the database file is given by P1.  But, unlike Destroy, do not
5383 ** remove the table or index from the database file.
5384 **
5385 ** The table being clear is in the main database file if P2==0.  If
5386 ** P2==1 then the table to be clear is in the auxiliary database file
5387 ** that is used to store tables create using CREATE TEMPORARY TABLE.
5388 **
5389 ** If the P3 value is non-zero, then the table referred to must be an
5390 ** intkey table (an SQL table, not an index). In this case the row change
5391 ** count is incremented by the number of rows in the table being cleared.
5392 ** If P3 is greater than zero, then the value stored in register P3 is
5393 ** also incremented by the number of rows in the table being cleared.
5394 **
5395 ** See also: Destroy
5396 */
5397 case OP_Clear: {
5398   int nChange;
5399 
5400   nChange = 0;
5401   assert( p->readOnly==0 );
5402   assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p2) );
5403   rc = sqlite3BtreeClearTable(
5404       db->aDb[pOp->p2].pBt, pOp->p1, (pOp->p3 ? &nChange : 0)
5405   );
5406   if( pOp->p3 ){
5407     p->nChange += nChange;
5408     if( pOp->p3>0 ){
5409       assert( memIsValid(&aMem[pOp->p3]) );
5410       memAboutToChange(p, &aMem[pOp->p3]);
5411       aMem[pOp->p3].u.i += nChange;
5412     }
5413   }
5414   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
5415   break;
5416 }
5417 
5418 /* Opcode: ResetSorter P1 * * * *
5419 **
5420 ** Delete all contents from the ephemeral table or sorter
5421 ** that is open on cursor P1.
5422 **
5423 ** This opcode only works for cursors used for sorting and
5424 ** opened with OP_OpenEphemeral or OP_SorterOpen.
5425 */
5426 case OP_ResetSorter: {
5427   VdbeCursor *pC;
5428 
5429   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
5430   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
5431   assert( pC!=0 );
5432   if( isSorter(pC) ){
5433     sqlite3VdbeSorterReset(db, pC->uc.pSorter);
5434   }else{
5435     assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
5436     assert( pC->isEphemeral );
5437     rc = sqlite3BtreeClearTableOfCursor(pC->uc.pCursor);
5438     if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
5439   }
5440   break;
5441 }
5442 
5443 /* Opcode: CreateTable P1 P2 * * *
5444 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=root iDb=P1
5445 **
5446 ** Allocate a new table in the main database file if P1==0 or in the
5447 ** auxiliary database file if P1==1 or in an attached database if
5448 ** P1>1.  Write the root page number of the new table into
5449 ** register P2
5450 **
5451 ** The difference between a table and an index is this:  A table must
5452 ** have a 4-byte integer key and can have arbitrary data.  An index
5453 ** has an arbitrary key but no data.
5454 **
5455 ** See also: CreateIndex
5456 */
5457 /* Opcode: CreateIndex P1 P2 * * *
5458 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=root iDb=P1
5459 **
5460 ** Allocate a new index in the main database file if P1==0 or in the
5461 ** auxiliary database file if P1==1 or in an attached database if
5462 ** P1>1.  Write the root page number of the new table into
5463 ** register P2.
5464 **
5465 ** See documentation on OP_CreateTable for additional information.
5466 */
5467 case OP_CreateIndex:            /* out2 */
5468 case OP_CreateTable: {          /* out2 */
5469   int pgno;
5470   int flags;
5471   Db *pDb;
5472 
5473   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
5474   pgno = 0;
5475   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb );
5476   assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p1) );
5477   assert( p->readOnly==0 );
5478   pDb = &db->aDb[pOp->p1];
5479   assert( pDb->pBt!=0 );
5480   if( pOp->opcode==OP_CreateTable ){
5481     /* flags = BTREE_INTKEY; */
5482     flags = BTREE_INTKEY;
5483   }else{
5484     flags = BTREE_BLOBKEY;
5485   }
5486   rc = sqlite3BtreeCreateTable(pDb->pBt, &pgno, flags);
5487   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
5488   pOut->u.i = pgno;
5489   break;
5490 }
5491 
5492 /* Opcode: ParseSchema P1 * * P4 *
5493 **
5494 ** Read and parse all entries from the SQLITE_MASTER table of database P1
5495 ** that match the WHERE clause P4.
5496 **
5497 ** This opcode invokes the parser to create a new virtual machine,
5498 ** then runs the new virtual machine.  It is thus a re-entrant opcode.
5499 */
5500 case OP_ParseSchema: {
5501   int iDb;
5502   const char *zMaster;
5503   char *zSql;
5504   InitData initData;
5505 
5506   /* Any prepared statement that invokes this opcode will hold mutexes
5507   ** on every btree.  This is a prerequisite for invoking
5508   ** sqlite3InitCallback().
5509   */
5510 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
5511   for(iDb=0; iDb<db->nDb; iDb++){
5512     assert( iDb==1 || sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(db->aDb[iDb].pBt) );
5513   }
5514 #endif
5515 
5516   iDb = pOp->p1;
5517   assert( iDb>=0 && iDb<db->nDb );
5518   assert( DbHasProperty(db, iDb, DB_SchemaLoaded) );
5519   /* Used to be a conditional */ {
5520     zMaster = MASTER_NAME;
5521     initData.db = db;
5522     initData.iDb = pOp->p1;
5523     initData.pzErrMsg = &p->zErrMsg;
5524     zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
5525        "SELECT name, rootpage, sql FROM '%q'.%s WHERE %s ORDER BY rowid",
5526        db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName, zMaster, pOp->p4.z);
5527     if( zSql==0 ){
5528       rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
5529     }else{
5530       assert( db->init.busy==0 );
5531       db->init.busy = 1;
5532       initData.rc = SQLITE_OK;
5533       assert( !db->mallocFailed );
5534       rc = sqlite3_exec(db, zSql, sqlite3InitCallback, &initData, 0);
5535       if( rc==SQLITE_OK ) rc = initData.rc;
5536       sqlite3DbFree(db, zSql);
5537       db->init.busy = 0;
5538     }
5539   }
5540   if( rc ){
5541     sqlite3ResetAllSchemasOfConnection(db);
5542     if( rc==SQLITE_NOMEM ){
5543       goto no_mem;
5544     }
5545     goto abort_due_to_error;
5546   }
5547   break;
5548 }
5549 
5550 #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE)
5551 /* Opcode: LoadAnalysis P1 * * * *
5552 **
5553 ** Read the sqlite_stat1 table for database P1 and load the content
5554 ** of that table into the internal index hash table.  This will cause
5555 ** the analysis to be used when preparing all subsequent queries.
5556 */
5557 case OP_LoadAnalysis: {
5558   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb );
5559   rc = sqlite3AnalysisLoad(db, pOp->p1);
5560   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
5561   break;
5562 }
5563 #endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE) */
5564 
5565 /* Opcode: DropTable P1 * * P4 *
5566 **
5567 ** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe
5568 ** the table named P4 in database P1.  This is called after a table
5569 ** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep
5570 ** the internal representation of the
5571 ** schema consistent with what is on disk.
5572 */
5573 case OP_DropTable: {
5574   sqlite3UnlinkAndDeleteTable(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p4.z);
5575   break;
5576 }
5577 
5578 /* Opcode: DropIndex P1 * * P4 *
5579 **
5580 ** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe
5581 ** the index named P4 in database P1.  This is called after an index
5582 ** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode)
5583 ** in order to keep the internal representation of the
5584 ** schema consistent with what is on disk.
5585 */
5586 case OP_DropIndex: {
5587   sqlite3UnlinkAndDeleteIndex(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p4.z);
5588   break;
5589 }
5590 
5591 /* Opcode: DropTrigger P1 * * P4 *
5592 **
5593 ** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe
5594 ** the trigger named P4 in database P1.  This is called after a trigger
5595 ** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep
5596 ** the internal representation of the
5597 ** schema consistent with what is on disk.
5598 */
5599 case OP_DropTrigger: {
5600   sqlite3UnlinkAndDeleteTrigger(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p4.z);
5601   break;
5602 }
5603 
5604 
5605 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INTEGRITY_CHECK
5606 /* Opcode: IntegrityCk P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
5607 **
5608 ** Do an analysis of the currently open database.  Store in
5609 ** register P1 the text of an error message describing any problems.
5610 ** If no problems are found, store a NULL in register P1.
5611 **
5612 ** The register P3 contains the maximum number of allowed errors.
5613 ** At most reg(P3) errors will be reported.
5614 ** In other words, the analysis stops as soon as reg(P1) errors are
5615 ** seen.  Reg(P1) is updated with the number of errors remaining.
5616 **
5617 ** The root page numbers of all tables in the database are integers
5618 ** stored in P4_INTARRAY argument.
5619 **
5620 ** If P5 is not zero, the check is done on the auxiliary database
5621 ** file, not the main database file.
5622 **
5623 ** This opcode is used to implement the integrity_check pragma.
5624 */
5625 case OP_IntegrityCk: {
5626   int nRoot;      /* Number of tables to check.  (Number of root pages.) */
5627   int *aRoot;     /* Array of rootpage numbers for tables to be checked */
5628   int nErr;       /* Number of errors reported */
5629   char *z;        /* Text of the error report */
5630   Mem *pnErr;     /* Register keeping track of errors remaining */
5631 
5632   assert( p->bIsReader );
5633   nRoot = pOp->p2;
5634   aRoot = pOp->p4.ai;
5635   assert( nRoot>0 );
5636   assert( aRoot[nRoot]==0 );
5637   assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) );
5638   pnErr = &aMem[pOp->p3];
5639   assert( (pnErr->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 );
5640   assert( (pnErr->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))==0 );
5641   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
5642   assert( pOp->p5<db->nDb );
5643   assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p5) );
5644   z = sqlite3BtreeIntegrityCheck(db->aDb[pOp->p5].pBt, aRoot, nRoot,
5645                                  (int)pnErr->u.i, &nErr);
5646   pnErr->u.i -= nErr;
5647   sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pIn1);
5648   if( nErr==0 ){
5649     assert( z==0 );
5650   }else if( z==0 ){
5651     goto no_mem;
5652   }else{
5653     sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pIn1, z, -1, SQLITE_UTF8, sqlite3_free);
5654   }
5655   UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pIn1);
5656   sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pIn1, encoding);
5657   break;
5658 }
5659 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_INTEGRITY_CHECK */
5660 
5661 /* Opcode: RowSetAdd P1 P2 * * *
5662 ** Synopsis: rowset(P1)=r[P2]
5663 **
5664 ** Insert the integer value held by register P2 into a boolean index
5665 ** held in register P1.
5666 **
5667 ** An assertion fails if P2 is not an integer.
5668 */
5669 case OP_RowSetAdd: {       /* in1, in2 */
5670   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
5671   pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2];
5672   assert( (pIn2->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 );
5673   if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 ){
5674     sqlite3VdbeMemSetRowSet(pIn1);
5675     if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 ) goto no_mem;
5676   }
5677   sqlite3RowSetInsert(pIn1->u.pRowSet, pIn2->u.i);
5678   break;
5679 }
5680 
5681 /* Opcode: RowSetRead P1 P2 P3 * *
5682 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=rowset(P1)
5683 **
5684 ** Extract the smallest value from boolean index P1 and put that value into
5685 ** register P3.  Or, if boolean index P1 is initially empty, leave P3
5686 ** unchanged and jump to instruction P2.
5687 */
5688 case OP_RowSetRead: {       /* jump, in1, out3 */
5689   i64 val;
5690 
5691   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
5692   if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0
5693    || sqlite3RowSetNext(pIn1->u.pRowSet, &val)==0
5694   ){
5695     /* The boolean index is empty */
5696     sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pIn1);
5697     VdbeBranchTaken(1,2);
5698     goto jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt;
5699   }else{
5700     /* A value was pulled from the index */
5701     VdbeBranchTaken(0,2);
5702     sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(&aMem[pOp->p3], val);
5703   }
5704   goto check_for_interrupt;
5705 }
5706 
5707 /* Opcode: RowSetTest P1 P2 P3 P4
5708 ** Synopsis: if r[P3] in rowset(P1) goto P2
5709 **
5710 ** Register P3 is assumed to hold a 64-bit integer value. If register P1
5711 ** contains a RowSet object and that RowSet object contains
5712 ** the value held in P3, jump to register P2. Otherwise, insert the
5713 ** integer in P3 into the RowSet and continue on to the
5714 ** next opcode.
5715 **
5716 ** The RowSet object is optimized for the case where successive sets
5717 ** of integers, where each set contains no duplicates. Each set
5718 ** of values is identified by a unique P4 value. The first set
5719 ** must have P4==0, the final set P4=-1.  P4 must be either -1 or
5720 ** non-negative.  For non-negative values of P4 only the lower 4
5721 ** bits are significant.
5722 **
5723 ** This allows optimizations: (a) when P4==0 there is no need to test
5724 ** the rowset object for P3, as it is guaranteed not to contain it,
5725 ** (b) when P4==-1 there is no need to insert the value, as it will
5726 ** never be tested for, and (c) when a value that is part of set X is
5727 ** inserted, there is no need to search to see if the same value was
5728 ** previously inserted as part of set X (only if it was previously
5729 ** inserted as part of some other set).
5730 */
5731 case OP_RowSetTest: {                     /* jump, in1, in3 */
5732   int iSet;
5733   int exists;
5734 
5735   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
5736   pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3];
5737   iSet = pOp->p4.i;
5738   assert( pIn3->flags&MEM_Int );
5739 
5740   /* If there is anything other than a rowset object in memory cell P1,
5741   ** delete it now and initialize P1 with an empty rowset
5742   */
5743   if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 ){
5744     sqlite3VdbeMemSetRowSet(pIn1);
5745     if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 ) goto no_mem;
5746   }
5747 
5748   assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 );
5749   assert( iSet==-1 || iSet>=0 );
5750   if( iSet ){
5751     exists = sqlite3RowSetTest(pIn1->u.pRowSet, iSet, pIn3->u.i);
5752     VdbeBranchTaken(exists!=0,2);
5753     if( exists ) goto jump_to_p2;
5754   }
5755   if( iSet>=0 ){
5756     sqlite3RowSetInsert(pIn1->u.pRowSet, pIn3->u.i);
5757   }
5758   break;
5759 }
5760 
5761 
5762 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
5763 
5764 /* Opcode: Program P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
5765 **
5766 ** Execute the trigger program passed as P4 (type P4_SUBPROGRAM).
5767 **
5768 ** P1 contains the address of the memory cell that contains the first memory
5769 ** cell in an array of values used as arguments to the sub-program. P2
5770 ** contains the address to jump to if the sub-program throws an IGNORE
5771 ** exception using the RAISE() function. Register P3 contains the address
5772 ** of a memory cell in this (the parent) VM that is used to allocate the
5773 ** memory required by the sub-vdbe at runtime.
5774 **
5775 ** P4 is a pointer to the VM containing the trigger program.
5776 **
5777 ** If P5 is non-zero, then recursive program invocation is enabled.
5778 */
5779 case OP_Program: {        /* jump */
5780   int nMem;               /* Number of memory registers for sub-program */
5781   int nByte;              /* Bytes of runtime space required for sub-program */
5782   Mem *pRt;               /* Register to allocate runtime space */
5783   Mem *pMem;              /* Used to iterate through memory cells */
5784   Mem *pEnd;              /* Last memory cell in new array */
5785   VdbeFrame *pFrame;      /* New vdbe frame to execute in */
5786   SubProgram *pProgram;   /* Sub-program to execute */
5787   void *t;                /* Token identifying trigger */
5788 
5789   pProgram = pOp->p4.pProgram;
5790   pRt = &aMem[pOp->p3];
5791   assert( pProgram->nOp>0 );
5792 
5793   /* If the p5 flag is clear, then recursive invocation of triggers is
5794   ** disabled for backwards compatibility (p5 is set if this sub-program
5795   ** is really a trigger, not a foreign key action, and the flag set
5796   ** and cleared by the "PRAGMA recursive_triggers" command is clear).
5797   **
5798   ** It is recursive invocation of triggers, at the SQL level, that is
5799   ** disabled. In some cases a single trigger may generate more than one
5800   ** SubProgram (if the trigger may be executed with more than one different
5801   ** ON CONFLICT algorithm). SubProgram structures associated with a
5802   ** single trigger all have the same value for the SubProgram.token
5803   ** variable.  */
5804   if( pOp->p5 ){
5805     t = pProgram->token;
5806     for(pFrame=p->pFrame; pFrame && pFrame->token!=t; pFrame=pFrame->pParent);
5807     if( pFrame ) break;
5808   }
5809 
5810   if( p->nFrame>=db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_TRIGGER_DEPTH] ){
5811     rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
5812     sqlite3VdbeError(p, "too many levels of trigger recursion");
5813     goto abort_due_to_error;
5814   }
5815 
5816   /* Register pRt is used to store the memory required to save the state
5817   ** of the current program, and the memory required at runtime to execute
5818   ** the trigger program. If this trigger has been fired before, then pRt
5819   ** is already allocated. Otherwise, it must be initialized.  */
5820   if( (pRt->flags&MEM_Frame)==0 ){
5821     /* SubProgram.nMem is set to the number of memory cells used by the
5822     ** program stored in SubProgram.aOp. As well as these, one memory
5823     ** cell is required for each cursor used by the program. Set local
5824     ** variable nMem (and later, VdbeFrame.nChildMem) to this value.
5825     */
5826     nMem = pProgram->nMem + pProgram->nCsr;
5827     assert( nMem>0 );
5828     if( pProgram->nCsr==0 ) nMem++;
5829     nByte = ROUND8(sizeof(VdbeFrame))
5830               + nMem * sizeof(Mem)
5831               + pProgram->nCsr * sizeof(VdbeCursor *);
5832     pFrame = sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, nByte);
5833     if( !pFrame ){
5834       goto no_mem;
5835     }
5836     sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(pRt);
5837     pRt->flags = MEM_Frame;
5838     pRt->u.pFrame = pFrame;
5839 
5840     pFrame->v = p;
5841     pFrame->nChildMem = nMem;
5842     pFrame->nChildCsr = pProgram->nCsr;
5843     pFrame->pc = (int)(pOp - aOp);
5844     pFrame->aMem = p->aMem;
5845     pFrame->nMem = p->nMem;
5846     pFrame->apCsr = p->apCsr;
5847     pFrame->nCursor = p->nCursor;
5848     pFrame->aOp = p->aOp;
5849     pFrame->nOp = p->nOp;
5850     pFrame->token = pProgram->token;
5851 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS
5852     pFrame->anExec = p->anExec;
5853 #endif
5854 
5855     pEnd = &VdbeFrameMem(pFrame)[pFrame->nChildMem];
5856     for(pMem=VdbeFrameMem(pFrame); pMem!=pEnd; pMem++){
5857       pMem->flags = MEM_Undefined;
5858       pMem->db = db;
5859     }
5860   }else{
5861     pFrame = pRt->u.pFrame;
5862     assert( pProgram->nMem+pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildMem
5863         || (pProgram->nCsr==0 && pProgram->nMem+1==pFrame->nChildMem) );
5864     assert( pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildCsr );
5865     assert( (int)(pOp - aOp)==pFrame->pc );
5866   }
5867 
5868   p->nFrame++;
5869   pFrame->pParent = p->pFrame;
5870   pFrame->lastRowid = db->lastRowid;
5871   pFrame->nChange = p->nChange;
5872   pFrame->nDbChange = p->db->nChange;
5873   assert( pFrame->pAuxData==0 );
5874   pFrame->pAuxData = p->pAuxData;
5875   p->pAuxData = 0;
5876   p->nChange = 0;
5877   p->pFrame = pFrame;
5878   p->aMem = aMem = VdbeFrameMem(pFrame);
5879   p->nMem = pFrame->nChildMem;
5880   p->nCursor = (u16)pFrame->nChildCsr;
5881   p->apCsr = (VdbeCursor **)&aMem[p->nMem];
5882   p->aOp = aOp = pProgram->aOp;
5883   p->nOp = pProgram->nOp;
5884 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS
5885   p->anExec = 0;
5886 #endif
5887   pOp = &aOp[-1];
5888 
5889   break;
5890 }
5891 
5892 /* Opcode: Param P1 P2 * * *
5893 **
5894 ** This opcode is only ever present in sub-programs called via the
5895 ** OP_Program instruction. Copy a value currently stored in a memory
5896 ** cell of the calling (parent) frame to cell P2 in the current frames
5897 ** address space. This is used by trigger programs to access the new.*
5898 ** and old.* values.
5899 **
5900 ** The address of the cell in the parent frame is determined by adding
5901 ** the value of the P1 argument to the value of the P1 argument to the
5902 ** calling OP_Program instruction.
5903 */
5904 case OP_Param: {           /* out2 */
5905   VdbeFrame *pFrame;
5906   Mem *pIn;
5907   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
5908   pFrame = p->pFrame;
5909   pIn = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p1 + pFrame->aOp[pFrame->pc].p1];
5910   sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pIn, MEM_Ephem);
5911   break;
5912 }
5913 
5914 #endif /* #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER */
5915 
5916 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY
5917 /* Opcode: FkCounter P1 P2 * * *
5918 ** Synopsis: fkctr[P1]+=P2
5919 **
5920 ** Increment a "constraint counter" by P2 (P2 may be negative or positive).
5921 ** If P1 is non-zero, the database constraint counter is incremented
5922 ** (deferred foreign key constraints). Otherwise, if P1 is zero, the
5923 ** statement counter is incremented (immediate foreign key constraints).
5924 */
5925 case OP_FkCounter: {
5926   if( db->flags & SQLITE_DeferFKs ){
5927     db->nDeferredImmCons += pOp->p2;
5928   }else if( pOp->p1 ){
5929     db->nDeferredCons += pOp->p2;
5930   }else{
5931     p->nFkConstraint += pOp->p2;
5932   }
5933   break;
5934 }
5935 
5936 /* Opcode: FkIfZero P1 P2 * * *
5937 ** Synopsis: if fkctr[P1]==0 goto P2
5938 **
5939 ** This opcode tests if a foreign key constraint-counter is currently zero.
5940 ** If so, jump to instruction P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next
5941 ** instruction.
5942 **
5943 ** If P1 is non-zero, then the jump is taken if the database constraint-counter
5944 ** is zero (the one that counts deferred constraint violations). If P1 is
5945 ** zero, the jump is taken if the statement constraint-counter is zero
5946 ** (immediate foreign key constraint violations).
5947 */
5948 case OP_FkIfZero: {         /* jump */
5949   if( pOp->p1 ){
5950     VdbeBranchTaken(db->nDeferredCons==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0, 2);
5951     if( db->nDeferredCons==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0 ) goto jump_to_p2;
5952   }else{
5953     VdbeBranchTaken(p->nFkConstraint==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0, 2);
5954     if( p->nFkConstraint==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0 ) goto jump_to_p2;
5955   }
5956   break;
5957 }
5958 #endif /* #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY */
5959 
5960 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT
5961 /* Opcode: MemMax P1 P2 * * *
5962 ** Synopsis: r[P1]=max(r[P1],r[P2])
5963 **
5964 ** P1 is a register in the root frame of this VM (the root frame is
5965 ** different from the current frame if this instruction is being executed
5966 ** within a sub-program). Set the value of register P1 to the maximum of
5967 ** its current value and the value in register P2.
5968 **
5969 ** This instruction throws an error if the memory cell is not initially
5970 ** an integer.
5971 */
5972 case OP_MemMax: {        /* in2 */
5973   VdbeFrame *pFrame;
5974   if( p->pFrame ){
5975     for(pFrame=p->pFrame; pFrame->pParent; pFrame=pFrame->pParent);
5976     pIn1 = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p1];
5977   }else{
5978     pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
5979   }
5980   assert( memIsValid(pIn1) );
5981   sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pIn1);
5982   pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2];
5983   sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pIn2);
5984   if( pIn1->u.i<pIn2->u.i){
5985     pIn1->u.i = pIn2->u.i;
5986   }
5987   break;
5988 }
5989 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT */
5990 
5991 /* Opcode: IfPos P1 P2 P3 * *
5992 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]>0 then r[P1]-=P3, goto P2
5993 **
5994 ** Register P1 must contain an integer.
5995 ** If the value of register P1 is 1 or greater, subtract P3 from the
5996 ** value in P1 and jump to P2.
5997 **
5998 ** If the initial value of register P1 is less than 1, then the
5999 ** value is unchanged and control passes through to the next instruction.
6000 */
6001 case OP_IfPos: {        /* jump, in1 */
6002   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
6003   assert( pIn1->flags&MEM_Int );
6004   VdbeBranchTaken( pIn1->u.i>0, 2);
6005   if( pIn1->u.i>0 ){
6006     pIn1->u.i -= pOp->p3;
6007     goto jump_to_p2;
6008   }
6009   break;
6010 }
6011 
6012 /* Opcode: OffsetLimit P1 P2 P3 * *
6013 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]>0 then r[P2]=r[P1]+max(0,r[P3]) else r[P2]=(-1)
6014 **
6015 ** This opcode performs a commonly used computation associated with
6016 ** LIMIT and OFFSET process.  r[P1] holds the limit counter.  r[P3]
6017 ** holds the offset counter.  The opcode computes the combined value
6018 ** of the LIMIT and OFFSET and stores that value in r[P2].  The r[P2]
6019 ** value computed is the total number of rows that will need to be
6020 ** visited in order to complete the query.
6021 **
6022 ** If r[P3] is zero or negative, that means there is no OFFSET
6023 ** and r[P2] is set to be the value of the LIMIT, r[P1].
6024 **
6025 ** if r[P1] is zero or negative, that means there is no LIMIT
6026 ** and r[P2] is set to -1.
6027 **
6028 ** Otherwise, r[P2] is set to the sum of r[P1] and r[P3].
6029 */
6030 case OP_OffsetLimit: {    /* in1, out2, in3 */
6031   i64 x;
6032   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
6033   pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3];
6034   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
6035   assert( pIn1->flags & MEM_Int );
6036   assert( pIn3->flags & MEM_Int );
6037   x = pIn1->u.i;
6038   if( x<=0 || sqlite3AddInt64(&x, pIn3->u.i>0?pIn3->u.i:0) ){
6039     /* If the LIMIT is less than or equal to zero, loop forever.  This
6040     ** is documented.  But also, if the LIMIT+OFFSET exceeds 2^63 then
6041     ** also loop forever.  This is undocumented.  In fact, one could argue
6042     ** that the loop should terminate.  But assuming 1 billion iterations
6043     ** per second (far exceeding the capabilities of any current hardware)
6044     ** it would take nearly 300 years to actually reach the limit.  So
6045     ** looping forever is a reasonable approximation. */
6046     pOut->u.i = -1;
6047   }else{
6048     pOut->u.i = x;
6049   }
6050   break;
6051 }
6052 
6053 /* Opcode: IfNotZero P1 P2 * * *
6054 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]!=0 then r[P1]--, goto P2
6055 **
6056 ** Register P1 must contain an integer.  If the content of register P1 is
6057 ** initially greater than zero, then decrement the value in register P1.
6058 ** If it is non-zero (negative or positive) and then also jump to P2.
6059 ** If register P1 is initially zero, leave it unchanged and fall through.
6060 */
6061 case OP_IfNotZero: {        /* jump, in1 */
6062   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
6063   assert( pIn1->flags&MEM_Int );
6064   VdbeBranchTaken(pIn1->u.i<0, 2);
6065   if( pIn1->u.i ){
6066      if( pIn1->u.i>0 ) pIn1->u.i--;
6067      goto jump_to_p2;
6068   }
6069   break;
6070 }
6071 
6072 /* Opcode: DecrJumpZero P1 P2 * * *
6073 ** Synopsis: if (--r[P1])==0 goto P2
6074 **
6075 ** Register P1 must hold an integer.  Decrement the value in P1
6076 ** and jump to P2 if the new value is exactly zero.
6077 */
6078 case OP_DecrJumpZero: {      /* jump, in1 */
6079   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
6080   assert( pIn1->flags&MEM_Int );
6081   if( pIn1->u.i>SMALLEST_INT64 ) pIn1->u.i--;
6082   VdbeBranchTaken(pIn1->u.i==0, 2);
6083   if( pIn1->u.i==0 ) goto jump_to_p2;
6084   break;
6085 }
6086 
6087 
6088 /* Opcode: AggStep0 * P2 P3 P4 P5
6089 ** Synopsis: accum=r[P3] step(r[P2@P5])
6090 **
6091 ** Execute the step function for an aggregate.  The
6092 ** function has P5 arguments.   P4 is a pointer to the FuncDef
6093 ** structure that specifies the function.  Register P3 is the
6094 ** accumulator.
6095 **
6096 ** The P5 arguments are taken from register P2 and its
6097 ** successors.
6098 */
6099 /* Opcode: AggStep * P2 P3 P4 P5
6100 ** Synopsis: accum=r[P3] step(r[P2@P5])
6101 **
6102 ** Execute the step function for an aggregate.  The
6103 ** function has P5 arguments.   P4 is a pointer to an sqlite3_context
6104 ** object that is used to run the function.  Register P3 is
6105 ** as the accumulator.
6106 **
6107 ** The P5 arguments are taken from register P2 and its
6108 ** successors.
6109 **
6110 ** This opcode is initially coded as OP_AggStep0.  On first evaluation,
6111 ** the FuncDef stored in P4 is converted into an sqlite3_context and
6112 ** the opcode is changed.  In this way, the initialization of the
6113 ** sqlite3_context only happens once, instead of on each call to the
6114 ** step function.
6115 */
6116 case OP_AggStep0: {
6117   int n;
6118   sqlite3_context *pCtx;
6119 
6120   assert( pOp->p4type==P4_FUNCDEF );
6121   n = pOp->p5;
6122   assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) );
6123   assert( n==0 || (pOp->p2>0 && pOp->p2+n<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1) );
6124   assert( pOp->p3<pOp->p2 || pOp->p3>=pOp->p2+n );
6125   pCtx = sqlite3DbMallocRawNN(db, sizeof(*pCtx) + (n-1)*sizeof(sqlite3_value*));
6126   if( pCtx==0 ) goto no_mem;
6127   pCtx->pMem = 0;
6128   pCtx->pFunc = pOp->p4.pFunc;
6129   pCtx->iOp = (int)(pOp - aOp);
6130   pCtx->pVdbe = p;
6131   pCtx->argc = n;
6132   pOp->p4type = P4_FUNCCTX;
6133   pOp->p4.pCtx = pCtx;
6134   pOp->opcode = OP_AggStep;
6135   /* Fall through into OP_AggStep */
6136 }
6137 case OP_AggStep: {
6138   int i;
6139   sqlite3_context *pCtx;
6140   Mem *pMem;
6141   Mem t;
6142 
6143   assert( pOp->p4type==P4_FUNCCTX );
6144   pCtx = pOp->p4.pCtx;
6145   pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3];
6146 
6147   /* If this function is inside of a trigger, the register array in aMem[]
6148   ** might change from one evaluation to the next.  The next block of code
6149   ** checks to see if the register array has changed, and if so it
6150   ** reinitializes the relavant parts of the sqlite3_context object */
6151   if( pCtx->pMem != pMem ){
6152     pCtx->pMem = pMem;
6153     for(i=pCtx->argc-1; i>=0; i--) pCtx->argv[i] = &aMem[pOp->p2+i];
6154   }
6155 
6156 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
6157   for(i=0; i<pCtx->argc; i++){
6158     assert( memIsValid(pCtx->argv[i]) );
6159     REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2+i, pCtx->argv[i]);
6160   }
6161 #endif
6162 
6163   pMem->n++;
6164   sqlite3VdbeMemInit(&t, db, MEM_Null);
6165   pCtx->pOut = &t;
6166   pCtx->fErrorOrAux = 0;
6167   pCtx->skipFlag = 0;
6168   (pCtx->pFunc->xSFunc)(pCtx,pCtx->argc,pCtx->argv); /* IMP: R-24505-23230 */
6169   if( pCtx->fErrorOrAux ){
6170     if( pCtx->isError ){
6171       sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3_value_text(&t));
6172       rc = pCtx->isError;
6173     }
6174     sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(&t);
6175     if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
6176   }else{
6177     assert( t.flags==MEM_Null );
6178   }
6179   if( pCtx->skipFlag ){
6180     assert( pOp[-1].opcode==OP_CollSeq );
6181     i = pOp[-1].p1;
6182     if( i ) sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(&aMem[i], 1);
6183   }
6184   break;
6185 }
6186 
6187 /* Opcode: AggFinal P1 P2 * P4 *
6188 ** Synopsis: accum=r[P1] N=P2
6189 **
6190 ** Execute the finalizer function for an aggregate.  P1 is
6191 ** the memory location that is the accumulator for the aggregate.
6192 **
6193 ** P2 is the number of arguments that the step function takes and
6194 ** P4 is a pointer to the FuncDef for this function.  The P2
6195 ** argument is not used by this opcode.  It is only there to disambiguate
6196 ** functions that can take varying numbers of arguments.  The
6197 ** P4 argument is only needed for the degenerate case where
6198 ** the step function was not previously called.
6199 */
6200 case OP_AggFinal: {
6201   Mem *pMem;
6202   assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) );
6203   pMem = &aMem[pOp->p1];
6204   assert( (pMem->flags & ~(MEM_Null|MEM_Agg))==0 );
6205   rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFinalize(pMem, pOp->p4.pFunc);
6206   if( rc ){
6207     sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3_value_text(pMem));
6208     goto abort_due_to_error;
6209   }
6210   sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pMem, encoding);
6211   UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pMem);
6212   if( sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pMem) ){
6213     goto too_big;
6214   }
6215   break;
6216 }
6217 
6218 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL
6219 /* Opcode: Checkpoint P1 P2 P3 * *
6220 **
6221 ** Checkpoint database P1. This is a no-op if P1 is not currently in
6222 ** WAL mode. Parameter P2 is one of SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE, FULL,
6223 ** RESTART, or TRUNCATE.  Write 1 or 0 into mem[P3] if the checkpoint returns
6224 ** SQLITE_BUSY or not, respectively.  Write the number of pages in the
6225 ** WAL after the checkpoint into mem[P3+1] and the number of pages
6226 ** in the WAL that have been checkpointed after the checkpoint
6227 ** completes into mem[P3+2].  However on an error, mem[P3+1] and
6228 ** mem[P3+2] are initialized to -1.
6229 */
6230 case OP_Checkpoint: {
6231   int i;                          /* Loop counter */
6232   int aRes[3];                    /* Results */
6233   Mem *pMem;                      /* Write results here */
6234 
6235   assert( p->readOnly==0 );
6236   aRes[0] = 0;
6237   aRes[1] = aRes[2] = -1;
6238   assert( pOp->p2==SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE
6239        || pOp->p2==SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL
6240        || pOp->p2==SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_RESTART
6241        || pOp->p2==SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_TRUNCATE
6242   );
6243   rc = sqlite3Checkpoint(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p2, &aRes[1], &aRes[2]);
6244   if( rc ){
6245     if( rc!=SQLITE_BUSY ) goto abort_due_to_error;
6246     rc = SQLITE_OK;
6247     aRes[0] = 1;
6248   }
6249   for(i=0, pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; i<3; i++, pMem++){
6250     sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem, (i64)aRes[i]);
6251   }
6252   break;
6253 };
6254 #endif
6255 
6256 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PRAGMA
6257 /* Opcode: JournalMode P1 P2 P3 * *
6258 **
6259 ** Change the journal mode of database P1 to P3. P3 must be one of the
6260 ** PAGER_JOURNALMODE_XXX values. If changing between the various rollback
6261 ** modes (delete, truncate, persist, off and memory), this is a simple
6262 ** operation. No IO is required.
6263 **
6264 ** If changing into or out of WAL mode the procedure is more complicated.
6265 **
6266 ** Write a string containing the final journal-mode to register P2.
6267 */
6268 case OP_JournalMode: {    /* out2 */
6269   Btree *pBt;                     /* Btree to change journal mode of */
6270   Pager *pPager;                  /* Pager associated with pBt */
6271   int eNew;                       /* New journal mode */
6272   int eOld;                       /* The old journal mode */
6273 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL
6274   const char *zFilename;          /* Name of database file for pPager */
6275 #endif
6276 
6277   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
6278   eNew = pOp->p3;
6279   assert( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE
6280        || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE
6281        || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST
6282        || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
6283        || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
6284        || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
6285        || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_QUERY
6286   );
6287   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb );
6288   assert( p->readOnly==0 );
6289 
6290   pBt = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt;
6291   pPager = sqlite3BtreePager(pBt);
6292   eOld = sqlite3PagerGetJournalMode(pPager);
6293   if( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_QUERY ) eNew = eOld;
6294   if( !sqlite3PagerOkToChangeJournalMode(pPager) ) eNew = eOld;
6295 
6296 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL
6297   zFilename = sqlite3PagerFilename(pPager, 1);
6298 
6299   /* Do not allow a transition to journal_mode=WAL for a database
6300   ** in temporary storage or if the VFS does not support shared memory
6301   */
6302   if( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
6303    && (sqlite3Strlen30(zFilename)==0           /* Temp file */
6304        || !sqlite3PagerWalSupported(pPager))   /* No shared-memory support */
6305   ){
6306     eNew = eOld;
6307   }
6308 
6309   if( (eNew!=eOld)
6310    && (eOld==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL)
6311   ){
6312     if( !db->autoCommit || db->nVdbeRead>1 ){
6313       rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
6314       sqlite3VdbeError(p,
6315           "cannot change %s wal mode from within a transaction",
6316           (eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ? "into" : "out of")
6317       );
6318       goto abort_due_to_error;
6319     }else{
6320 
6321       if( eOld==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ){
6322         /* If leaving WAL mode, close the log file. If successful, the call
6323         ** to PagerCloseWal() checkpoints and deletes the write-ahead-log
6324         ** file. An EXCLUSIVE lock may still be held on the database file
6325         ** after a successful return.
6326         */
6327         rc = sqlite3PagerCloseWal(pPager, db);
6328         if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
6329           sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(pPager, eNew);
6330         }
6331       }else if( eOld==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY ){
6332         /* Cannot transition directly from MEMORY to WAL.  Use mode OFF
6333         ** as an intermediate */
6334         sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(pPager, PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF);
6335       }
6336 
6337       /* Open a transaction on the database file. Regardless of the journal
6338       ** mode, this transaction always uses a rollback journal.
6339       */
6340       assert( sqlite3BtreeIsInTrans(pBt)==0 );
6341       if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
6342         rc = sqlite3BtreeSetVersion(pBt, (eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ? 2 : 1));
6343       }
6344     }
6345   }
6346 #endif /* ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL */
6347 
6348   if( rc ) eNew = eOld;
6349   eNew = sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(pPager, eNew);
6350 
6351   pOut->flags = MEM_Str|MEM_Static|MEM_Term;
6352   pOut->z = (char *)sqlite3JournalModename(eNew);
6353   pOut->n = sqlite3Strlen30(pOut->z);
6354   pOut->enc = SQLITE_UTF8;
6355   sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pOut, encoding);
6356   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
6357   break;
6358 };
6359 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_PRAGMA */
6360 
6361 #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VACUUM) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ATTACH)
6362 /* Opcode: Vacuum P1 * * * *
6363 **
6364 ** Vacuum the entire database P1.  P1 is 0 for "main", and 2 or more
6365 ** for an attached database.  The "temp" database may not be vacuumed.
6366 */
6367 case OP_Vacuum: {
6368   assert( p->readOnly==0 );
6369   rc = sqlite3RunVacuum(&p->zErrMsg, db, pOp->p1);
6370   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
6371   break;
6372 }
6373 #endif
6374 
6375 #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM)
6376 /* Opcode: IncrVacuum P1 P2 * * *
6377 **
6378 ** Perform a single step of the incremental vacuum procedure on
6379 ** the P1 database. If the vacuum has finished, jump to instruction
6380 ** P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next instruction.
6381 */
6382 case OP_IncrVacuum: {        /* jump */
6383   Btree *pBt;
6384 
6385   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb );
6386   assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p1) );
6387   assert( p->readOnly==0 );
6388   pBt = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt;
6389   rc = sqlite3BtreeIncrVacuum(pBt);
6390   VdbeBranchTaken(rc==SQLITE_DONE,2);
6391   if( rc ){
6392     if( rc!=SQLITE_DONE ) goto abort_due_to_error;
6393     rc = SQLITE_OK;
6394     goto jump_to_p2;
6395   }
6396   break;
6397 }
6398 #endif
6399 
6400 /* Opcode: Expire P1 * * * *
6401 **
6402 ** Cause precompiled statements to expire.  When an expired statement
6403 ** is executed using sqlite3_step() it will either automatically
6404 ** reprepare itself (if it was originally created using sqlite3_prepare_v2())
6405 ** or it will fail with SQLITE_SCHEMA.
6406 **
6407 ** If P1 is 0, then all SQL statements become expired. If P1 is non-zero,
6408 ** then only the currently executing statement is expired.
6409 */
6410 case OP_Expire: {
6411   if( !pOp->p1 ){
6412     sqlite3ExpirePreparedStatements(db);
6413   }else{
6414     p->expired = 1;
6415   }
6416   break;
6417 }
6418 
6419 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE
6420 /* Opcode: TableLock P1 P2 P3 P4 *
6421 ** Synopsis: iDb=P1 root=P2 write=P3
6422 **
6423 ** Obtain a lock on a particular table. This instruction is only used when
6424 ** the shared-cache feature is enabled.
6425 **
6426 ** P1 is the index of the database in sqlite3.aDb[] of the database
6427 ** on which the lock is acquired.  A readlock is obtained if P3==0 or
6428 ** a write lock if P3==1.
6429 **
6430 ** P2 contains the root-page of the table to lock.
6431 **
6432 ** P4 contains a pointer to the name of the table being locked. This is only
6433 ** used to generate an error message if the lock cannot be obtained.
6434 */
6435 case OP_TableLock: {
6436   u8 isWriteLock = (u8)pOp->p3;
6437   if( isWriteLock || 0==(db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommitted) ){
6438     int p1 = pOp->p1;
6439     assert( p1>=0 && p1<db->nDb );
6440     assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, p1) );
6441     assert( isWriteLock==0 || isWriteLock==1 );
6442     rc = sqlite3BtreeLockTable(db->aDb[p1].pBt, pOp->p2, isWriteLock);
6443     if( rc ){
6444       if( (rc&0xFF)==SQLITE_LOCKED ){
6445         const char *z = pOp->p4.z;
6446         sqlite3VdbeError(p, "database table is locked: %s", z);
6447       }
6448       goto abort_due_to_error;
6449     }
6450   }
6451   break;
6452 }
6453 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE */
6454 
6455 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
6456 /* Opcode: VBegin * * * P4 *
6457 **
6458 ** P4 may be a pointer to an sqlite3_vtab structure. If so, call the
6459 ** xBegin method for that table.
6460 **
6461 ** Also, whether or not P4 is set, check that this is not being called from
6462 ** within a callback to a virtual table xSync() method. If it is, the error
6463 ** code will be set to SQLITE_LOCKED.
6464 */
6465 case OP_VBegin: {
6466   VTable *pVTab;
6467   pVTab = pOp->p4.pVtab;
6468   rc = sqlite3VtabBegin(db, pVTab);
6469   if( pVTab ) sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVTab->pVtab);
6470   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
6471   break;
6472 }
6473 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */
6474 
6475 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
6476 /* Opcode: VCreate P1 P2 * * *
6477 **
6478 ** P2 is a register that holds the name of a virtual table in database
6479 ** P1. Call the xCreate method for that table.
6480 */
6481 case OP_VCreate: {
6482   Mem sMem;          /* For storing the record being decoded */
6483   const char *zTab;  /* Name of the virtual table */
6484 
6485   memset(&sMem, 0, sizeof(sMem));
6486   sMem.db = db;
6487   /* Because P2 is always a static string, it is impossible for the
6488   ** sqlite3VdbeMemCopy() to fail */
6489   assert( (aMem[pOp->p2].flags & MEM_Str)!=0 );
6490   assert( (aMem[pOp->p2].flags & MEM_Static)!=0 );
6491   rc = sqlite3VdbeMemCopy(&sMem, &aMem[pOp->p2]);
6492   assert( rc==SQLITE_OK );
6493   zTab = (const char*)sqlite3_value_text(&sMem);
6494   assert( zTab || db->mallocFailed );
6495   if( zTab ){
6496     rc = sqlite3VtabCallCreate(db, pOp->p1, zTab, &p->zErrMsg);
6497   }
6498   sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(&sMem);
6499   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
6500   break;
6501 }
6502 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */
6503 
6504 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
6505 /* Opcode: VDestroy P1 * * P4 *
6506 **
6507 ** P4 is the name of a virtual table in database P1.  Call the xDestroy method
6508 ** of that table.
6509 */
6510 case OP_VDestroy: {
6511   db->nVDestroy++;
6512   rc = sqlite3VtabCallDestroy(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p4.z);
6513   db->nVDestroy--;
6514   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
6515   break;
6516 }
6517 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */
6518 
6519 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
6520 /* Opcode: VOpen P1 * * P4 *
6521 **
6522 ** P4 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure.
6523 ** P1 is a cursor number.  This opcode opens a cursor to the virtual
6524 ** table and stores that cursor in P1.
6525 */
6526 case OP_VOpen: {
6527   VdbeCursor *pCur;
6528   sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVCur;
6529   sqlite3_vtab *pVtab;
6530   const sqlite3_module *pModule;
6531 
6532   assert( p->bIsReader );
6533   pCur = 0;
6534   pVCur = 0;
6535   pVtab = pOp->p4.pVtab->pVtab;
6536   if( pVtab==0 || NEVER(pVtab->pModule==0) ){
6537     rc = SQLITE_LOCKED;
6538     goto abort_due_to_error;
6539   }
6540   pModule = pVtab->pModule;
6541   rc = pModule->xOpen(pVtab, &pVCur);
6542   sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab);
6543   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
6544 
6545   /* Initialize sqlite3_vtab_cursor base class */
6546   pVCur->pVtab = pVtab;
6547 
6548   /* Initialize vdbe cursor object */
6549   pCur = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, 0, -1, CURTYPE_VTAB);
6550   if( pCur ){
6551     pCur->uc.pVCur = pVCur;
6552     pVtab->nRef++;
6553   }else{
6554     assert( db->mallocFailed );
6555     pModule->xClose(pVCur);
6556     goto no_mem;
6557   }
6558   break;
6559 }
6560 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */
6561 
6562 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
6563 /* Opcode: VFilter P1 P2 P3 P4 *
6564 ** Synopsis: iplan=r[P3] zplan='P4'
6565 **
6566 ** P1 is a cursor opened using VOpen.  P2 is an address to jump to if
6567 ** the filtered result set is empty.
6568 **
6569 ** P4 is either NULL or a string that was generated by the xBestIndex
6570 ** method of the module.  The interpretation of the P4 string is left
6571 ** to the module implementation.
6572 **
6573 ** This opcode invokes the xFilter method on the virtual table specified
6574 ** by P1.  The integer query plan parameter to xFilter is stored in register
6575 ** P3. Register P3+1 stores the argc parameter to be passed to the
6576 ** xFilter method. Registers P3+2..P3+1+argc are the argc
6577 ** additional parameters which are passed to
6578 ** xFilter as argv. Register P3+2 becomes argv[0] when passed to xFilter.
6579 **
6580 ** A jump is made to P2 if the result set after filtering would be empty.
6581 */
6582 case OP_VFilter: {   /* jump */
6583   int nArg;
6584   int iQuery;
6585   const sqlite3_module *pModule;
6586   Mem *pQuery;
6587   Mem *pArgc;
6588   sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVCur;
6589   sqlite3_vtab *pVtab;
6590   VdbeCursor *pCur;
6591   int res;
6592   int i;
6593   Mem **apArg;
6594 
6595   pQuery = &aMem[pOp->p3];
6596   pArgc = &pQuery[1];
6597   pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
6598   assert( memIsValid(pQuery) );
6599   REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pQuery);
6600   assert( pCur->eCurType==CURTYPE_VTAB );
6601   pVCur = pCur->uc.pVCur;
6602   pVtab = pVCur->pVtab;
6603   pModule = pVtab->pModule;
6604 
6605   /* Grab the index number and argc parameters */
6606   assert( (pQuery->flags&MEM_Int)!=0 && pArgc->flags==MEM_Int );
6607   nArg = (int)pArgc->u.i;
6608   iQuery = (int)pQuery->u.i;
6609 
6610   /* Invoke the xFilter method */
6611   res = 0;
6612   apArg = p->apArg;
6613   for(i = 0; i<nArg; i++){
6614     apArg[i] = &pArgc[i+1];
6615   }
6616   rc = pModule->xFilter(pVCur, iQuery, pOp->p4.z, nArg, apArg);
6617   sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab);
6618   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
6619   res = pModule->xEof(pVCur);
6620   pCur->nullRow = 0;
6621   VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2);
6622   if( res ) goto jump_to_p2;
6623   break;
6624 }
6625 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */
6626 
6627 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
6628 /* Opcode: VColumn P1 P2 P3 * *
6629 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=vcolumn(P2)
6630 **
6631 ** Store the value of the P2-th column of
6632 ** the row of the virtual-table that the
6633 ** P1 cursor is pointing to into register P3.
6634 */
6635 case OP_VColumn: {
6636   sqlite3_vtab *pVtab;
6637   const sqlite3_module *pModule;
6638   Mem *pDest;
6639   sqlite3_context sContext;
6640 
6641   VdbeCursor *pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
6642   assert( pCur->eCurType==CURTYPE_VTAB );
6643   assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) );
6644   pDest = &aMem[pOp->p3];
6645   memAboutToChange(p, pDest);
6646   if( pCur->nullRow ){
6647     sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pDest);
6648     break;
6649   }
6650   pVtab = pCur->uc.pVCur->pVtab;
6651   pModule = pVtab->pModule;
6652   assert( pModule->xColumn );
6653   memset(&sContext, 0, sizeof(sContext));
6654   sContext.pOut = pDest;
6655   MemSetTypeFlag(pDest, MEM_Null);
6656   rc = pModule->xColumn(pCur->uc.pVCur, &sContext, pOp->p2);
6657   sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab);
6658   if( sContext.isError ){
6659     rc = sContext.isError;
6660   }
6661   sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pDest, encoding);
6662   REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pDest);
6663   UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pDest);
6664 
6665   if( sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pDest) ){
6666     goto too_big;
6667   }
6668   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
6669   break;
6670 }
6671 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */
6672 
6673 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
6674 /* Opcode: VNext P1 P2 * * *
6675 **
6676 ** Advance virtual table P1 to the next row in its result set and
6677 ** jump to instruction P2.  Or, if the virtual table has reached
6678 ** the end of its result set, then fall through to the next instruction.
6679 */
6680 case OP_VNext: {   /* jump */
6681   sqlite3_vtab *pVtab;
6682   const sqlite3_module *pModule;
6683   int res;
6684   VdbeCursor *pCur;
6685 
6686   res = 0;
6687   pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
6688   assert( pCur->eCurType==CURTYPE_VTAB );
6689   if( pCur->nullRow ){
6690     break;
6691   }
6692   pVtab = pCur->uc.pVCur->pVtab;
6693   pModule = pVtab->pModule;
6694   assert( pModule->xNext );
6695 
6696   /* Invoke the xNext() method of the module. There is no way for the
6697   ** underlying implementation to return an error if one occurs during
6698   ** xNext(). Instead, if an error occurs, true is returned (indicating that
6699   ** data is available) and the error code returned when xColumn or
6700   ** some other method is next invoked on the save virtual table cursor.
6701   */
6702   rc = pModule->xNext(pCur->uc.pVCur);
6703   sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab);
6704   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
6705   res = pModule->xEof(pCur->uc.pVCur);
6706   VdbeBranchTaken(!res,2);
6707   if( !res ){
6708     /* If there is data, jump to P2 */
6709     goto jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt;
6710   }
6711   goto check_for_interrupt;
6712 }
6713 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */
6714 
6715 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
6716 /* Opcode: VRename P1 * * P4 *
6717 **
6718 ** P4 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure.
6719 ** This opcode invokes the corresponding xRename method. The value
6720 ** in register P1 is passed as the zName argument to the xRename method.
6721 */
6722 case OP_VRename: {
6723   sqlite3_vtab *pVtab;
6724   Mem *pName;
6725 
6726   pVtab = pOp->p4.pVtab->pVtab;
6727   pName = &aMem[pOp->p1];
6728   assert( pVtab->pModule->xRename );
6729   assert( memIsValid(pName) );
6730   assert( p->readOnly==0 );
6731   REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1, pName);
6732   assert( pName->flags & MEM_Str );
6733   testcase( pName->enc==SQLITE_UTF8 );
6734   testcase( pName->enc==SQLITE_UTF16BE );
6735   testcase( pName->enc==SQLITE_UTF16LE );
6736   rc = sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pName, SQLITE_UTF8);
6737   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
6738   rc = pVtab->pModule->xRename(pVtab, pName->z);
6739   sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab);
6740   p->expired = 0;
6741   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
6742   break;
6743 }
6744 #endif
6745 
6746 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
6747 /* Opcode: VUpdate P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
6748 ** Synopsis: data=r[P3@P2]
6749 **
6750 ** P4 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure.
6751 ** This opcode invokes the corresponding xUpdate method. P2 values
6752 ** are contiguous memory cells starting at P3 to pass to the xUpdate
6753 ** invocation. The value in register (P3+P2-1) corresponds to the
6754 ** p2th element of the argv array passed to xUpdate.
6755 **
6756 ** The xUpdate method will do a DELETE or an INSERT or both.
6757 ** The argv[0] element (which corresponds to memory cell P3)
6758 ** is the rowid of a row to delete.  If argv[0] is NULL then no
6759 ** deletion occurs.  The argv[1] element is the rowid of the new
6760 ** row.  This can be NULL to have the virtual table select the new
6761 ** rowid for itself.  The subsequent elements in the array are
6762 ** the values of columns in the new row.
6763 **
6764 ** If P2==1 then no insert is performed.  argv[0] is the rowid of
6765 ** a row to delete.
6766 **
6767 ** P1 is a boolean flag. If it is set to true and the xUpdate call
6768 ** is successful, then the value returned by sqlite3_last_insert_rowid()
6769 ** is set to the value of the rowid for the row just inserted.
6770 **
6771 ** P5 is the error actions (OE_Replace, OE_Fail, OE_Ignore, etc) to
6772 ** apply in the case of a constraint failure on an insert or update.
6773 */
6774 case OP_VUpdate: {
6775   sqlite3_vtab *pVtab;
6776   const sqlite3_module *pModule;
6777   int nArg;
6778   int i;
6779   sqlite_int64 rowid;
6780   Mem **apArg;
6781   Mem *pX;
6782 
6783   assert( pOp->p2==1        || pOp->p5==OE_Fail   || pOp->p5==OE_Rollback
6784        || pOp->p5==OE_Abort || pOp->p5==OE_Ignore || pOp->p5==OE_Replace
6785   );
6786   assert( p->readOnly==0 );
6787   pVtab = pOp->p4.pVtab->pVtab;
6788   if( pVtab==0 || NEVER(pVtab->pModule==0) ){
6789     rc = SQLITE_LOCKED;
6790     goto abort_due_to_error;
6791   }
6792   pModule = pVtab->pModule;
6793   nArg = pOp->p2;
6794   assert( pOp->p4type==P4_VTAB );
6795   if( ALWAYS(pModule->xUpdate) ){
6796     u8 vtabOnConflict = db->vtabOnConflict;
6797     apArg = p->apArg;
6798     pX = &aMem[pOp->p3];
6799     for(i=0; i<nArg; i++){
6800       assert( memIsValid(pX) );
6801       memAboutToChange(p, pX);
6802       apArg[i] = pX;
6803       pX++;
6804     }
6805     db->vtabOnConflict = pOp->p5;
6806     rc = pModule->xUpdate(pVtab, nArg, apArg, &rowid);
6807     db->vtabOnConflict = vtabOnConflict;
6808     sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab);
6809     if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pOp->p1 ){
6810       assert( nArg>1 && apArg[0] && (apArg[0]->flags&MEM_Null) );
6811       db->lastRowid = rowid;
6812     }
6813     if( (rc&0xff)==SQLITE_CONSTRAINT && pOp->p4.pVtab->bConstraint ){
6814       if( pOp->p5==OE_Ignore ){
6815         rc = SQLITE_OK;
6816       }else{
6817         p->errorAction = ((pOp->p5==OE_Replace) ? OE_Abort : pOp->p5);
6818       }
6819     }else{
6820       p->nChange++;
6821     }
6822     if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
6823   }
6824   break;
6825 }
6826 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */
6827 
6828 #ifndef  SQLITE_OMIT_PAGER_PRAGMAS
6829 /* Opcode: Pagecount P1 P2 * * *
6830 **
6831 ** Write the current number of pages in database P1 to memory cell P2.
6832 */
6833 case OP_Pagecount: {            /* out2 */
6834   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
6835   pOut->u.i = sqlite3BtreeLastPage(db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt);
6836   break;
6837 }
6838 #endif
6839 
6840 
6841 #ifndef  SQLITE_OMIT_PAGER_PRAGMAS
6842 /* Opcode: MaxPgcnt P1 P2 P3 * *
6843 **
6844 ** Try to set the maximum page count for database P1 to the value in P3.
6845 ** Do not let the maximum page count fall below the current page count and
6846 ** do not change the maximum page count value if P3==0.
6847 **
6848 ** Store the maximum page count after the change in register P2.
6849 */
6850 case OP_MaxPgcnt: {            /* out2 */
6851   unsigned int newMax;
6852   Btree *pBt;
6853 
6854   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
6855   pBt = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt;
6856   newMax = 0;
6857   if( pOp->p3 ){
6858     newMax = sqlite3BtreeLastPage(pBt);
6859     if( newMax < (unsigned)pOp->p3 ) newMax = (unsigned)pOp->p3;
6860   }
6861   pOut->u.i = sqlite3BtreeMaxPageCount(pBt, newMax);
6862   break;
6863 }
6864 #endif
6865 
6866 
6867 /* Opcode: Init P1 P2 * P4 *
6868 ** Synopsis: Start at P2
6869 **
6870 ** Programs contain a single instance of this opcode as the very first
6871 ** opcode.
6872 **
6873 ** If tracing is enabled (by the sqlite3_trace()) interface, then
6874 ** the UTF-8 string contained in P4 is emitted on the trace callback.
6875 ** Or if P4 is blank, use the string returned by sqlite3_sql().
6876 **
6877 ** If P2 is not zero, jump to instruction P2.
6878 **
6879 ** Increment the value of P1 so that OP_Once opcodes will jump the
6880 ** first time they are evaluated for this run.
6881 */
6882 case OP_Init: {          /* jump */
6883   char *zTrace;
6884   int i;
6885 
6886   /* If the P4 argument is not NULL, then it must be an SQL comment string.
6887   ** The "--" string is broken up to prevent false-positives with srcck1.c.
6888   **
6889   ** This assert() provides evidence for:
6890   ** EVIDENCE-OF: R-50676-09860 The callback can compute the same text that
6891   ** would have been returned by the legacy sqlite3_trace() interface by
6892   ** using the X argument when X begins with "--" and invoking
6893   ** sqlite3_expanded_sql(P) otherwise.
6894   */
6895   assert( pOp->p4.z==0 || strncmp(pOp->p4.z, "-" "- ", 3)==0 );
6896   assert( pOp==p->aOp );  /* Always instruction 0 */
6897 
6898 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE
6899   if( (db->mTrace & (SQLITE_TRACE_STMT|SQLITE_TRACE_LEGACY))!=0
6900    && !p->doingRerun
6901    && (zTrace = (pOp->p4.z ? pOp->p4.z : p->zSql))!=0
6902   ){
6903 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED
6904     if( db->mTrace & SQLITE_TRACE_LEGACY ){
6905       void (*x)(void*,const char*) = (void(*)(void*,const char*))db->xTrace;
6906       char *z = sqlite3VdbeExpandSql(p, zTrace);
6907       x(db->pTraceArg, z);
6908       sqlite3_free(z);
6909     }else
6910 #endif
6911     {
6912       (void)db->xTrace(SQLITE_TRACE_STMT, db->pTraceArg, p, zTrace);
6913     }
6914   }
6915 #ifdef SQLITE_USE_FCNTL_TRACE
6916   zTrace = (pOp->p4.z ? pOp->p4.z : p->zSql);
6917   if( zTrace ){
6918     int j;
6919     for(j=0; j<db->nDb; j++){
6920       if( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, j)==0 ) continue;
6921       sqlite3_file_control(db, db->aDb[j].zDbSName, SQLITE_FCNTL_TRACE, zTrace);
6922     }
6923   }
6924 #endif /* SQLITE_USE_FCNTL_TRACE */
6925 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
6926   if( (db->flags & SQLITE_SqlTrace)!=0
6927    && (zTrace = (pOp->p4.z ? pOp->p4.z : p->zSql))!=0
6928   ){
6929     sqlite3DebugPrintf("SQL-trace: %s\n", zTrace);
6930   }
6931 #endif /* SQLITE_DEBUG */
6932 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE */
6933   assert( pOp->p2>0 );
6934   if( pOp->p1>=sqlite3GlobalConfig.iOnceResetThreshold ){
6935     for(i=1; i<p->nOp; i++){
6936       if( p->aOp[i].opcode==OP_Once ) p->aOp[i].p1 = 0;
6937     }
6938     pOp->p1 = 0;
6939   }
6940   pOp->p1++;
6941   goto jump_to_p2;
6942 }
6943 
6944 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_CURSOR_HINTS
6945 /* Opcode: CursorHint P1 * * P4 *
6946 **
6947 ** Provide a hint to cursor P1 that it only needs to return rows that
6948 ** satisfy the Expr in P4.  TK_REGISTER terms in the P4 expression refer
6949 ** to values currently held in registers.  TK_COLUMN terms in the P4
6950 ** expression refer to columns in the b-tree to which cursor P1 is pointing.
6951 */
6952 case OP_CursorHint: {
6953   VdbeCursor *pC;
6954 
6955   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
6956   assert( pOp->p4type==P4_EXPR );
6957   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
6958   if( pC ){
6959     assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
6960     sqlite3BtreeCursorHint(pC->uc.pCursor, BTREE_HINT_RANGE,
6961                            pOp->p4.pExpr, aMem);
6962   }
6963   break;
6964 }
6965 #endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_CURSOR_HINTS */
6966 
6967 /* Opcode: Noop * * * * *
6968 **
6969 ** Do nothing.  This instruction is often useful as a jump
6970 ** destination.
6971 */
6972 /*
6973 ** The magic Explain opcode are only inserted when explain==2 (which
6974 ** is to say when the EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN syntax is used.)
6975 ** This opcode records information from the optimizer.  It is the
6976 ** the same as a no-op.  This opcodesnever appears in a real VM program.
6977 */
6978 default: {          /* This is really OP_Noop and OP_Explain */
6979   assert( pOp->opcode==OP_Noop || pOp->opcode==OP_Explain );
6980   break;
6981 }
6982 
6983 /*****************************************************************************
6984 ** The cases of the switch statement above this line should all be indented
6985 ** by 6 spaces.  But the left-most 6 spaces have been removed to improve the
6986 ** readability.  From this point on down, the normal indentation rules are
6987 ** restored.
6988 *****************************************************************************/
6989     }
6990 
6991 #ifdef VDBE_PROFILE
6992     {
6993       u64 endTime = sqlite3Hwtime();
6994       if( endTime>start ) pOrigOp->cycles += endTime - start;
6995       pOrigOp->cnt++;
6996     }
6997 #endif
6998 
6999     /* The following code adds nothing to the actual functionality
7000     ** of the program.  It is only here for testing and debugging.
7001     ** On the other hand, it does burn CPU cycles every time through
7002     ** the evaluator loop.  So we can leave it out when NDEBUG is defined.
7003     */
7004 #ifndef NDEBUG
7005     assert( pOp>=&aOp[-1] && pOp<&aOp[p->nOp-1] );
7006 
7007 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
7008     if( db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){
7009       u8 opProperty = sqlite3OpcodeProperty[pOrigOp->opcode];
7010       if( rc!=0 ) printf("rc=%d\n",rc);
7011       if( opProperty & (OPFLG_OUT2) ){
7012         registerTrace(pOrigOp->p2, &aMem[pOrigOp->p2]);
7013       }
7014       if( opProperty & OPFLG_OUT3 ){
7015         registerTrace(pOrigOp->p3, &aMem[pOrigOp->p3]);
7016       }
7017     }
7018 #endif  /* SQLITE_DEBUG */
7019 #endif  /* NDEBUG */
7020   }  /* The end of the for(;;) loop the loops through opcodes */
7021 
7022   /* If we reach this point, it means that execution is finished with
7023   ** an error of some kind.
7024   */
7025 abort_due_to_error:
7026   if( db->mallocFailed ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
7027   assert( rc );
7028   if( p->zErrMsg==0 && rc!=SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ){
7029     sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3ErrStr(rc));
7030   }
7031   p->rc = rc;
7032   sqlite3SystemError(db, rc);
7033   testcase( sqlite3GlobalConfig.xLog!=0 );
7034   sqlite3_log(rc, "statement aborts at %d: [%s] %s",
7035                    (int)(pOp - aOp), p->zSql, p->zErrMsg);
7036   sqlite3VdbeHalt(p);
7037   if( rc==SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ) sqlite3OomFault(db);
7038   rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
7039   if( resetSchemaOnFault>0 ){
7040     sqlite3ResetOneSchema(db, resetSchemaOnFault-1);
7041   }
7042 
7043   /* This is the only way out of this procedure.  We have to
7044   ** release the mutexes on btrees that were acquired at the
7045   ** top. */
7046 vdbe_return:
7047   testcase( nVmStep>0 );
7048   p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP] += (int)nVmStep;
7049   sqlite3VdbeLeave(p);
7050   assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || nExtraDelete==0
7051        || sqlite3_strlike("DELETE%",p->zSql,0)!=0
7052   );
7053   return rc;
7054 
7055   /* Jump to here if a string or blob larger than SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH
7056   ** is encountered.
7057   */
7058 too_big:
7059   sqlite3VdbeError(p, "string or blob too big");
7060   rc = SQLITE_TOOBIG;
7061   goto abort_due_to_error;
7062 
7063   /* Jump to here if a malloc() fails.
7064   */
7065 no_mem:
7066   sqlite3OomFault(db);
7067   sqlite3VdbeError(p, "out of memory");
7068   rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
7069   goto abort_due_to_error;
7070 
7071   /* Jump to here if the sqlite3_interrupt() API sets the interrupt
7072   ** flag.
7073   */
7074 abort_due_to_interrupt:
7075   assert( db->u1.isInterrupted );
7076   rc = db->mallocFailed ? SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT : SQLITE_INTERRUPT;
7077   p->rc = rc;
7078   sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3ErrStr(rc));
7079   goto abort_due_to_error;
7080 }
7081